DVD Recorder
DVR-920H
™
™
Operating Instructions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights owned by
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
equipment.
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC – +35 ºC (+41 ºF – +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
This product is for general household purposes. Any failure
due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-
term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a
car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for
even during the warranty period.
K041_En
VENTILATION CAUTION
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
10 cm at each side).
This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licenced by NEC
corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC
Corporation.
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
POWER-CORD CAUTION
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check
the power cord once in a while. When you find it
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when not left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel.
The cut-off plug should be disposed of and must
not be inserted into any 13 amp socket as this can
result in electric shock. The plug or adaptor or the
distribution panel should be provided with 5 A fuse.
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
appliance may not correspond with coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows ;
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be
connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter L or coloured red.
Do not connect either wire to the earth terminal of a
three pin plug.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
FOR USE IN THE UNITED
KINGDOM
After replacing or changing a fuse, the fuse cover in
the plug must be replaced with a fuse cover which
corresponds to the colour of the insert in the base
of the plug or the word that is embossed on the
base of the plug, and the appliance must not be
used without a fuse cover. If lost replacement fuse
covers can be obtained from your dealer.
Only 5 A fuses approved by B.S.I or A.S.T.A to
B.S.1362 should be used.
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code:
Blue
: Neutral
Brown : Live
If the plug provided is unsuitable for your socket
outlets, the plug must be cut off and a suitable plug
fitted.
D3-4-2-1-2-2_En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Contents
01 Before you start
05 Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . 8
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 9
About the internal hard disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
program guide
The GUIDE Plus+ System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . 49
06 Playback
02 Connecting up
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents
of a disc.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Navigating discs and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Scanning discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Switching DVD soundtracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Front panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Extra features for use with compatible TVs . . . . . . . . 13
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using other types of audio/video output . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or
digital terrestrial receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting an external decoder box (1) . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting an external decoder box (2) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting using HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Plugging in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
07 Recording
About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
About HDD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Recording time and picture quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 61
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Simultaneous recording and playback . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . 67
Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Recording from the DV output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . 69
Initializing a DVD-RW disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
03 Controls and displays
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
04 Getting started
Switching on and setting up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for playback and
recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Making your first recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Using the Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
08 Copying and back-up
14 The Initial Setup menu
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
One Touch Copy (HDD to DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
One Touch Copy (DVD to HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Copying from HDD to DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
HDD to DVD Copy List menu options. . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Recording the Copy List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
HDD to DVD Copy List commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Copying from DVD to HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
DVD to HDD Copy List menu options. . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Recording the Copy List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
DVD to HDD Copy List commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Using disc back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Tuner settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Video In / Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Audio In settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Audio Out settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Recording settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Playback settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
HDMI Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
15 Additional information
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . 123
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Manual recording modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Country code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
On-screen displays and recorder displays . . . . . . . 132
Handling discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Storing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Damaged discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
09 Editing
The Disc Navigator screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Disc Navigator menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Editing VR mode Original, Video mode and
HDD content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Editing HDD groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Creating and editing a VR mode Play List . . . . . . . . 94
10 Disc History
Using the Disc History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
11 The PhotoViewer
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
12 The Disc Setup menu
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Finalize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
HDD Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Index
13 The Video/Audio Adjust menu
Setting the picture quality for TV and external
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . 105
Audio DRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
CBhaepfteor 1re you start
•
Simultaneous recording and playback
VR mode
HDD
Features
Playback and recording for both DVDs and the built-in
hard disk drive (HDD) are completely independent. For
example you can record a broadcast program to either a
recordable DVD or the HDD, while watching another
recording you already made on the same DVD or on the
HDD.
™
•
Built-in GUIDE Plus+ electronic program guide
The GUIDE Plus+ system is an interactive on-screen TV
programming guide. You can see what’s on TV today and
in the coming week, search TV listings for certain
categories of program or by your own keywords, and even
set the recorder to record programs with the press of a
single button.
•
Disc Navigator
The on-screen Disc Navigator makes finding your way
around the contents of a disc or the HDD easy. For
recordable DVD and HDD content, moving thumbnail
images are displayed for ease of use. The Disc Navigator
is also where you can edit HDD and recordable DVD
content.
HDD
•
HDD recording
You can record up to 433 hours of video (in SLP mode) on
the internal 250GB (gigabyte) hard disk (HDD).
With both recordable DVD and a high-capacity HDD in
the same recorder, you have the flexibility to keep
recordings on the HDD for quick access anytime, or
record to DVD for archiving or playing on other DVD
players.
•
Disc History
The Disc History screen shows disc information,
including how much free space remains for recording,
for the last 30 recordable discs loaded in the recorder.
Every time you load a recordable disc, the Disc History is
automatically updated with the latest information.
•
Copy between HDD and DVD
You can copy recordings from the HDD to recordable
DVD, or from DVD to the HDD. Usually you can use the
high-speed copy feature, which can copy an hour of video
in under two minutes (when recorded in EP mode using
a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 / 8x disc).
•
Home Menu
The Home Menu gives you on-screen access to all the
recorder’s features in one convenient place, from setting
up the recorder, to programming a timer recording and
editing a recording.
You can also choose to copy material at a different
recording quality from the original. For example, you
might want to copy a FINE mode (highest quality)
recording on the HDD to SP (standard play) quality on a
DVD so that you can fit other recordings on the same
disc.
•
Progressive scan-compatible
Compared to standard interlaced video, progressive scan
effectively doubles the amount of video information fed to
your TV or monitor. The result is a stable, flicker-free
image. (Check your TV/monitor for compatibility with this
feature.)
•
One Touch Copy
One Touch Copy makes copying the currently playing title
from HDD to DVD, or DVD to HDD as simple as pressing
a button.
•
Cinema surround sound in your home
Connect this recorder to a Dolby Digital and/or DTS-
compatible AV amp/receiver to enjoy full surround sound
effects from Dolby Digital and DTS DVD discs.
VR mode
HDD
•
Chase play
Using chase play you can start watching a recording
before the recording has finished. For example, you could
set a timer recording for a program that you’re going to
miss the first 15 minutes of, then start watching while the
recorder is still recording the program 15 minutes ahead
of you.
•
Easy Timer Recording
Setting the recorder to record a program is simple from
the Easy Timer Recording screen. Set the channel to
record and the recording quality, then graphically set the
start and end times of the recording. That’s it!
6
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
•
Program up to 32 timer recordings
VR mode
HDD
•
Chapter marking
You can program the recorder to record up to 32
programs, up to a month in advance. As well as single
programs, you can specify daily or weekly recordings,
too.
You can easily add chapter markers anywhere in your
recordings for easy editing.
•
Play Video mode recordings on a regular DVD
This recorder is also compatible with VPS/PDC systems,
which ensure you don’t miss a timer recording, even if
the broadcast is not running to schedule.
Video mode
player
Discs recorded using the Video mode can be played back
on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives
compatible with DVD-Video playback .
*
•
One Touch Recording
*
Use One Touch Recording to start recording immediately
in 30 minute blocks. Each time you press the ì REC
button, the recording time is extended by another 30
minutes.
‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-
Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs
is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s
DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-
RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD
playback equipment, and there is DVD playback
equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs
recorded in the DVD-Video format.
•
Optimized recording
Optimized recording adjusts the recording quality
automatically if a timer recording will not fit onto a disc
with the settings that you made.
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.
•
High quality 16-bit Linear PCM audio
•
WMA, MP3 and JPEG file playback
This recorder can play WMA and MP3 audio files and
JPEG picture files on CD-R, CD-RW or CD-ROM discs.
When recording using one of the high quality record
settings (FINE or MN32), the audio is recorded in
uncompressed 16-bit Linear PCM format. This delivers
great sounding audio to accompany the high picture
quality.
•
Disc Back-up
The disc back-up feature gives you a convenient way to
back-up important material on DVD to another
recordable DVD disc. The material is first copied to the
HDD, then on to a second DVD disc.
•
Picture quality adjustment features
During playback, you can adjust various picture quality
settings to improve the picture. You can also adjust the
recording picture quality. For example, if you want to
make a DVD copy of an old video tape, you can optimize
the picture quality before transferring it to disc.
HDD
•
Recovery Recording
When a timer recording is set to use DVD but the disc
loaded at the time of the recording is unrecordable, the
program will automatically be recorded to the HDD.
•
Find what you want to watch quickly and easily
Unlike video tape that needs to be wound to the correct
place, you can jump right to the part of a DVD disc or the
HDD that you want to watch. Search for a point on a disc
by title, chapter or time.
HDD
•
Auto Replace Recording
This feature is useful for regular timer recordings of a TV
program which you don’t want to keep after watching.
Each time the program is recorded, it replaces the one
currently on the HDD. There’s no need to manually delete
it later.
•
Manual recording
In addition to the five preset recording quality modes
(FINE, SP, LP, EP and SLP), the manual recording mode
allows you to access 32 different recording quality/time
settings, giving you precise control over the recording.
Note on copying:
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you
are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in
which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as
films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or
consented to by the rightowners.
•
Record to and from a DV camcorder
This recorder has a built-in DV (Digital Video) input/
output jack for connection to a DV camcorder. This
makes it ideal for transferring camcorder footage to DVD
or HDD for editing. You can also transfer DVD or HDD
content back to the camcorder if you need to.
VR mode
•
Safe, non-destructive editing
When you edit a DVD-RW, the actual content of the disc
(the Original content) is not touched. The edited version
(the Play List content) just points to various parts of the
Original content.
7
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
What’s in the box
01
Using the remote control
Please confirm that the following accessories are in the
box when you open it.
Please keep in mind the following when using the remote
control:
• Remote control
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x2
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)
• RF antenna cable
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s
remote sensor.
• G-LINK cable
• Remote controllers for different devices can interfere
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other
equipment located close to this unit.
• Power cable
• These operating instructions
• Warranty card
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the
operating range of the remote.
• When the batteries run down or you change the
batteries, the remote control mode and TV preset
codes are automatically reset. See Remote Control
Mode on page 109 and Setting up the remote to
control your TV on page 123 to reset them.
Putting the batteries in the remote
control1
1
Open the battery compartment cover on the
• Use within the operating range and angle, as shown.
back of the remote control.
30
30
7m
• You can control this recorder using the remote
sensor of another Pioneer component using the
CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel
connections on page 12 for more information.
2
Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery
compartment following the indications (ꢀ,ꢁ) inside
the compartment.
3
Close the cover.
Note
1 Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following:
• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.
• Don’t use different kinds of batteries together—although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages.
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment.
• Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to be used for a month or more.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in
your country or area.
8
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD
writers may reject DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs. If you want
to share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an
older recorder/writer, we recommend using Ver. 1.1
discs.
Disc / content format playback
compatibility
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders
that are not fully compatible with DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x
discs.
General disc compatibility
This recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc
types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally
feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc
packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as
recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable
format—see below for further compatibility information.
Model
Playable
Yes1,2,3
Yes1
Recordable
DVR-7000
No
DVR-3100/ DVR-5100H
No
1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized
VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.
2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when
DVD-Video
DVD-R
DVD-RW
you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.
3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.
CD-R/RW compatibility
Audio CD
Video CD
CD-R
CD-RW
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.
• Compatible formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super
VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA or
JPEG files
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file
systems are both compatible with this recorder.
Fujicolor CD
• Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD
•
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and
Video CD/Super VCD)
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only
•
is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
This recorder also supports the IEC’s Super VCD
standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super
VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two
soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the
widescreen size.
Compressed audio compatibility
• Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3),
Windows Media Audio (WMA)
• Sampling rates: 44.1 or 48kHz
• Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended)
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes
• VBR WMA playback: No
VIDEO
CD
Super Video CD (Super VCD)
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec
8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be
playable but some parts of the specification are not
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)
DVD-R/RW compatibility
This recorder will play and record DVD-R/RW discs.
Compatible media:
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) file playback: No
(see also DRM in the Glossary on page 135)
• DVD-RW Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1 / 2x and Ver. 1.2 / 4x
• DVD-R Ver. 2.0 and Ver. 2.0 / 4x / 8x
Recording formats:
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for
the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do
not use for other file types)
• DVD-R: DVD-Video format (Video mode)
• DVD-RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD-
Video format (Video mode)
• File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these
limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these
limits are playable)
9
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility
Frequently asked questions
• What’s the difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW?
The most important difference between DVD-R and
DVD-RW is that DVD-R is a record-once medium,
while DVD-RW is a re-recordable/erasable medium.
You can re-record/erase a DVD-RW disc
approximately 1,000 times.
®
The Windows Media logo printed on the box indicates
For more information, see About DVD recording on
page 60.
that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio
content.
• What’s VR mode?
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers
to an audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by
using Windows Media Player version 7, 7.1, Windows
Media Player for Windows XP, or Windows Media
Player 9 Series.
VR (Video Recording) mode is a special mode
designed for home DVD recording. It allows flexible
editing of recorded material compared to ‘Video
mode’. On the other hand, Video mode discs are
more compatible with other DVD players.
®
®
®
®
• Can I play my recordable discs in a regular DVD player?
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Generally, DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs recorded
*
in Video mode are playable in a regular DVD player,
but they must be ‘finalized’ first. This process fixes
the contents of the disc to make them readable to
other DVD players as DVD-Video discs.
JPEG file compatibility
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2*
still image files
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode are playable in
some players.
*File format used by digital still cameras
This label indicates playback compatibility with
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Video
Recording format). However, for discs recorded with
a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can
only be achieved using the CPRM compatible device.
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:4:2, 4:2:0
• Horizontal resolution: 160 – 5120 pixels
• Vertical resolution: 120 – 3840 pixels
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No
Note that Pioneer cannot guarantee that discs
recorded using this recorder will play on other players.
• File extensions: .jpg, jpeg, jif, jfif (must be used for the
recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use for other
file types)
*
‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-
• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders
/ 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders
that this on the disc then more can be reloaded)
Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs
is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s
DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-
RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD
playback equipment, and there is DVD playback
equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs
recorded in the DVD-Video format.
PC-created disc compatibility
Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be
playable in this unit due to the setting of the application
software used to create the disc. In these particular
instances, check with the software publisher for more
detailed information.
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.
This recorder supports the recording of ‘copy-once’
broadcast programs using the CPRM copy protection
system (see CPRM on page 61) on CPRM-compliant
DVD-RW discs in VR mode. CPRM recordings can only
be played on players that are specifically compatible
with CPRM.
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are
not compatible with this recorder.
Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes
for additional compatibility information.
10
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start
01
• Do I need two DVD recorders for editing? What kind of
editing can I do?
About the internal hard disk drive
Unlike editing video tape, you only need one DVD
recorder to edit discs. With DVD, you edit by making
a ‘Play List’ of what to play and when to play it. On
playback, the recorder plays the disc according to the
Play List.
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of
equipment. Please use the recorder following the
guidelines below to protect against possible HDD failure.
We recommend that you back up your important
recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs in order to protect against
accidental loss.
Original
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
• Do not move the recorder while it is on.
• Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3 Chapter 1
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in
temperature can cause condensation to form inside
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.
• While the recorder is switched on or the front panel
display shows EPG, do not unplug from the wall
socket or switch the electricity off from the breaker
switch.
Title 1
Title 2
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Play List
• Do not move the recorder immediately after
switching it off or while the front panel display shows
EPG. If you need to move the recorder, please follow
the steps below:
Throughout this manual, you will often see the words
Original and Play List to refer to the actual content
and the edited version.
• Original content refers to what’s actually recorded
on the disc.
1 After the message POWER OFF is shown in the
display, wait at least two minutes.
• Play List content refers to the edited version of the
disc—how the Original content is to be played.
2 Unplug from the wall socket.
3 Move the recorder.
• If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be
lost.
• The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an
unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems
include playback unexpectedly freezing and
noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture.
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs
of HDD failure.
If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded material will
be possible. In this case it will be necessary to
replace the HDD unit.
Optimizing HDD performance
As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on
the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the
recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the
recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD
(which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see
Optimize HDD on page 103).
11
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Chapter 2
Connecting up
Rear panel connections
1
2
3
4
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV 1 (RGB) - TV
ANTENNA
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Y
COAXIAL
IN PUT 3
AC IN
P
B
R
G-LINK
IN
CONTROL
OUT
P
OPTICAL
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
OUT PUT
S-VIDEO
HDMI OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
1
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
9
OUTPUT
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB.
See AV2/L1 In on page 113 for how to set this up.
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for
connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
10 CONTROL IN
Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of
another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT
terminal and bearing the Pioneer ꢂ mark. Connect the
CONTROL OUT of the other component to the CONTROL
IN of this recorder using a mini-plug cord.
2
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector
Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The video output is switchable between video,
S-video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on page 112 for how
to set this up.
11 G-LINK
Use to connect the supplied G-LINK cable to enable
3
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
GUIDE Plus+ to control an external satellite receiver, etc.
A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or
monitor with a component video input.
4
ANTENNA IN/OUT
Front panel connections
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN jack. The
signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT jack for
connection to your TV.
DBY/ON
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L(MONO)
DV
R
IN/OUT
5
AC IN – Power inlet
INPUT
2
6
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Coaxial and optical digital audio jacks for connecting to
an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG
decoder or other equipment with a digital input.
On the left side of the front panel a flip-down cover hides
a second audio/video input, consisting of an S-video and
standard (composite) video jack, and stereo analog audio
jacks. Here you’ll also fine a DV input/output i.LINK
connector. This is for connection to a DV camcorder.
7
HDMI OUT
HDMI output providing a high quality interface for digital
audio and video.
8
INPUT 3
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video inputs for
connection to a VCR or other source component.
12
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Extra features for use with
compatible TVs
When this recorder is connected to a TV that features T-V
Link, EasyLink, MegaLogic, SMARTLINK, Q-Link, DATA
LOGIC or NexTView Link using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART
cable (not supplied), the following functions are
available:
• Direct TV recording
• Channel preset download
• NexTView timer programming download
• TV auto power on
• System configuration
Note that these functions cannot be used when the front
panel display shows EPG.
For further details and compatibility information, see also
the manual that came with your TV.
Direct TV recording
Direct TV recording allows you to record the TV program
that you’re watching, without having to worry about
whether this recorder is set to the same channel. See
Direct recording from TV on page 63 for more on this
feature.
Channel preset download
This feature allows you to set up the channel presets of
this recorder very simply using the channel presets and
preset names already in your TV. See Switching on and
setting up on page 26 and Auto Channel Setting :
Download from TV on page 110 for more on this feature.
NexTView timer programming download
NexTView timer programming download allows you to
program a timer recording directly from the NexTView
electronic program guide displayed on your TV.
See the manual that came with your TV for more
information on how to use this feature. Note that the SP
and LP options displayed on your TV correspond to the SP
and LP recording modes on this recorder.
TV auto power on
When you play a disc in this recorder, the TV
automatically turns on and switches to the correct video
input. See the manual that came with your TV for how to
use this feature.
System configuration
Basic settings, including language, country and TV
screen size (aspect ratio), can be downloaded from your
TV to help set up this recorder for use.
13
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Easy connections
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs. Other
types of connections are explained starting on the following page.
Important
• These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, see
the following page for connecting up using the supplied audio/video cable.
• The AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo analog audio.
The AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video input, as well as stereo analog
audio. See AV1 Out on page 112 and AV2/L1 In on page 113 for how to set them up.
• Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and
unplugged from the wall outlet.
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR.
• If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect
it to the ANTENNA IN jack on this recorder and skip
the next step.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
IN
2
Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to
connect the antenna output of your VCR to the
ANTENNA IN of this recorder.
3
TV
4
3
Use another RF antenna cable to connect the
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV
1
(RGB) TV
-
ANTENNA
IN
ANTENNA OUT of this recorder to the antenna input
on your TV.
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Y
IN PUT
3
AC IN
P
B
R
G-LINK
IN
CONTROL
P
OUT
DIGI
R
L
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
OUT PUT
S-VIDEO
AUDIO OU
4
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the
SCART AV connector on your TV.
5
2
5
Use another SCART cable to connect the
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your VCR.
ANTENNA
OUT
VCR
ANTENNA
IN
Tip
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power
Save on page 108).
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
14
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Using other types of audio/video output
If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output
jacks, as well as an S-video and component video output.
Using the supplied audio/video cable
Using the S-video or component video
output
AUDIO
INPUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
S-VIDEO
INPUT
TV
1
2
TV
2
1
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
COAXIAL
AV
1
(RGB) TV
-
ANTENNA
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Y
N P
AC IN
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
COAXIAL
AV
1
(RGB) TV
-
ANTENNA
IN
P
B
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
G-LINK
IN
CONTROL
P
OUT
Y
N PUT
3
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
R
L
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
OUT PUT
S-VIDEO
AC IN
AUDIO OUT
P
B
R
G-LINK
CONTROL
P
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
R
L
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
OUT PUT
S-VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
1
Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input
on your TV.
1
Connect the S-video or component video output
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable for
the video connection.
to a similar input on your TV.
For an S-video connection, use an S-video cable (not
supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUTPUT jack to an S-
video input on your TV
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/video
cable for the audio connection. Make sure you match up
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs
for correct stereo sound.
For a component video connection, use a component
video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV.
See also Component Video Out on page 112 for how to set
up the component video output for use with a progressive
scan-compatible TV.
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the
yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs
for correct stereo sound.
15
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver
If you have a cable, satellite or digital terrestrial receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV
1
as shown on this page. If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the
instructions on the next page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver.
• Change channels and set timer recordings on the external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+ system (via the G-LINK
cable, and after setting up).
Important
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or other component. Always connect
each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
4
Plug the supplied G-LINK cable to the G-LINK
jack.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
This enables you to control the tuner in the external
receiver through GUIDE Plus+.
ANTENNA
IN
Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK cable so
that the IR receiver on your cable/satellite/digital
terrestrial receiver will pick up the control signals (see
diagram).
2
TV
1
AV
1
(RGB) - TV
ANTENNA
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Y
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV
1
(RGB)
-
TV
IN PUT
3
ANTENNA
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
P
B
R
Y
G-LINK
IN
CONTROL
IN PUT
3
P
OUT
AC IN
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
OUT PUT
S-VIDEO
P
B
R
G-LINK
IN
CONTROL
P
OUT
OP
DIGITAL
R
L
DMI OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
OUT PUT
S-VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
3
1
4
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
OUT
G-LINK cable
See the manual that came with your cable/satellite/
digital terrestrial receiver if you’re not sure where the IR
receiver is on the front panel. Alternatively, experiment
with the remote control, operating it from very close
range until you find the place where the receiver
responds.
Cable/Satellite/
Digital Terrestrial
receiver
ANTENNA
IN
Satellite dish/
antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
1
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
Tip
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power
Save on page 108).
This enables you to watch discs.
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your cable box/satellite/digital
terrestrial receiver.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
Note
1 The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video connections.
16
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting an external decoder box (1)
If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this
page.
Important
• Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder.
• Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off
(in standby).
• For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be switched
on during recording.
• It is not possible to watch one TV program and record another using this setup.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
4
TV
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
COAXIAL
ANTENNA
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Y
IN PUT
3
AC IN
P
B
R
G-LINK
IN
CONTROL
P
OUT
DI
R
L
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
OUT PUT
S-VIDEO
AUDIO O
3
2
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
Decoder
VCR/Satellite receiver
/Cable box
ANTENNA
IN
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
3
Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box.
receiver/cable box to the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV connector on this recorder.
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your
4
Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV
decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.
See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed
instructions.
AV connector to your TV.
17
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting an external decoder box (2)
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
1
• Record scrambled channels received using the recorder’s built-in TV tuner.
Important
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
ANTENNA
IN
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
TV
2
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the
1
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your decoder box.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV
1
(RGB) TV
-
ANTENNA
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Y
IN PUT
3
AC IN
PB
G-LINK
IN
CONTROL
P
R
OUT
DIGIT
R
L
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
OUT PUT
S-VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
3
1
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
Decoder
Note
1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu:
• Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 113).
• From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 110).
18
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amplifier/receiver using the digital
optical output.
In addition to a digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection for
compatibility with all discs and sources.
You’ll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the ordinary video output (as
shown here), or the S-video output.
Important
• Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amplifier/receiver
properly (see Audio Out settings on page 114).
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
IN
TV
4
1
VIDEO
OUT
A/V
IN 1
DIGITAL
IN
AV amp/
receiver
2
3
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
COAXIAL
AV
1
(RGB) TV
-
ANTENNA
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Y
IN PUT
3
AC IN
P
B
R
G-LINK
IN
CONTROL
P
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
R
L
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
VIDO
OUT PU
S-VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
Important
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’
your VCR using A/V cables. Always connect it directly
to your TV.
2
Connect one of the DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL jack on
this recorder to an optical digital input on your AV
amplifier/receiver.
This enables you to listen to multichannel surround
sound.
3
Connect the analog AUDIO OUTPUT and VIDEO
OUTPUT jacks on this recorder to an analog audio
and video input on your AV amplifier/receiver.
4
Connect the AV amplifier/receiver’s video output
to a video input on your TV.
19
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Important
Connecting using HDMI
If you have a HDMI or DVI-equipped monitor or display ,
you can connect it to this recorder using an HDMI cable
(not supplied).
• An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-
equipped components compatible with both DVI and
High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP).
If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you wil
need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDCP
connection, however, does not support audio.
1
2
The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio.
Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
1
Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT
• When connected to an HDCP-compatible DVI
component, DVI 576P (PAL) or DVI 480P (NTSC) is
displayed and the HDMI indicator lights.
connector on this recorder to an HDMI connector on
an HDMI-compatible monitor.
• The HDMI connection is compatible with 44.1/48kHz,
16/20/24 bit 2-channel linear PCM signals, as well as
Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG audio bitstream.
HDMI
IN
About HDMI
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports
both video and audio on a single digital connection for
use with DVD players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes,
and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide
the technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital
content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant
displays.
HDMI-compatible display
AV
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)
COAXIAL
AV
1
(RGB) TV
-
ANTENNA
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Y
IN PUT
3
AC IN
P
B
G-LINK
IN
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
HDMI OUT
AUDIO OUT
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncom-
pressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 5 gigabits per
second (Dual Link), one connector (instead of several
cables and connectors), and communication between
the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be
face up for correct alignment with the connector on
the recorder.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
licensing LLC.
When connected to an HDMI component, HDMI 576P
(PAL) or HDMI 480P (NTSC) is shown in the front panel
display and the HDMI indicator lights.
HDMI setup is generally automatic. There are however
settings you can change if you need to. See HDMI Output
on page 121 for more information. Note that the HDMI
settings remain in effect until you change them, or
connect a new HDMI component.
Note
1 The resolution of this recorder’s HDMI video output is 576 x 480 pixels (PAL) or 480 x 720 pixels (NTSC) progressive. If your display is not com-
patible with these resolutions the picture may not be correctly reproduced.
2 This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) version 1.1. Depending on the component you
have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.
20
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting up
02
Connecting a DV camcorder
Using the front panel DV IN/OUT jack, it is possible to
connect a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW
recorder and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/RW
discs to DVD-R/RW.
Connecting other AV sources
Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder
DVD RECORDER DVR-920H
OPEN/CLOSE
ONE TOUCH
COPY
HDD
DVD
HDMI
STOP REC
STANDBY
/
ON
DISC
NAVIGATOR
INPUT
SELECT
REC
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L(MONO)
DV
/OUT
R
IN
ꢂ
ENTER
RETURN
REC MODE
Important
INPUT
2
• This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is
not compatible with digital satellite tuners or D-VHS
video decks.
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
1
2
DVD RECORDER DVR-920H
OPEN/CLOSE
ONE TOUCH
COPY
HDD
DVD
HDMI
STOP REC
STANDBY
/
ON
DISC
NAVIGATOR
INPUT
SELECT
REC
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L(MONO)
DV
/OUT
R
IN
ꢂ
ENTER
RETURN
REC MODE
INPUT
2
DV
IN/OUT
Analog camcorder
DV
IN/OUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
VCR
DV camcorder
1
Connect a set of audio and video outputs on your
1
Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV
VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder.
This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or
camcorder.
in/out jack on your DV camcorder/deck to the front
panel DV IN/OUT jack of this recorder.
• You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
• The front panel connections make convenient
connections for a camcorder.
Plugging in
Before plugging in for the first time, make sure that
everything is connected properly.
2
Connect a set of audio and video inputs on your
VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this
recorder.
This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR
or camcorder.
AC IN
• You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
• Alternatively, you can use the AV2(INPUT 1/
DECODER) SCART connector for audio/video input
and output with just one SCART cable.
1
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC IN
inlet and the other end into a standard household
power outlet.
21
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
CChaoptnert3rols and displays
Front panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
DVD RECORDER DVR-920H
ONE TOUCH
COPY
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD
DVD
STB CONTROL
HDMI
STOP REC
REC
STANDBY/ON
PULL
OPEN
ꢂ
12
Controls hidden behind the front panel door
13
14
15
16
17
DISC
NAVIGATOR
INPUT
SELECT
STANDBY/ON
REC
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L(MONO)
DV
IN/OUT
R
ENTER
ꢂ
RETURN
REC MODE
INPUT
2
18
19
20
21
22
1
HDD
10 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 72)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
Press to switch to the hard disk drive (HDD) for recording
and playback. The button lights when HDD is selected.
2
DVD
11 +/– (page 33, 35, 63)
Use to change TV channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc.
Press to switch to DVD for recording and playback. The
button lights when DVD is selected.
12 ꢆ STANDBY/ON
3
STB CONTROL indicator
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. The upper-
half of the button is backlit blue when the recorder is on.
Lights when this recorder is controlling an external
receiver via the G-LINK cable during timer recording.
13 Front panel display
4
HDMI indicator
See Display on page 23 for details.
Lights when this recorder is connected to another HDMI/
DVI (HDCP) compatible component.
14 IR remote sensor (page 8)
15 ì REC
5
6
Disc tray
Press to start recording. The upper-half of the button is
backlit red when recording; the lower-half is backlit
orange (blinking) when real-time copying.
ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
7
ꢄ
16 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 51, 86)
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen.
Press to stop playback.
8
ꢅ
17 INPUT SELECT (page 67)
Press to change the input to use for recording.
Press to start or restart playback.
9
STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
22
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
18 Front panel inputs (page 12)
21 RETURN
Pull the cover down where indicated to access the front
panel input jacks. Especially convenient for connecting
camcorders and other portable equipment.
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or
display.
22 REC MODE (page 61)
19 DV IN/OUT jack (page 12, 21, 67, 68, 69, 114, 129)
Digital input/output jack for use with a DV camcorder.
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture
quality).
20 ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to
select the currently highlighted option.
Display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13 14 15
16
12
1
ꢄ / ꢅ
9
R / RW
Arrows indicate the copy direction between the HDD
Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or
DVD-RW.
(
) and DVD (
).
2
ꢅ PLAY / ì REC indicators
10
(page 63)
Lights during playback / recording; blinks when playback
/ recording is paused.
Lights when a timer recording has been set.
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has
been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)
3
ꢇ ꢅ
(page 31)
The ‘ꢇ’ and ‘ꢅ’ indicators light to indicate that the HDD
or DVD is selected for recording/playback.
11 Recording quality indicators (page 60)
When no indicator is lit, recording quality is set to SLP,
otherwise the indicator shows the current setting:
4
PL (page 86, 94)
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is
in Play List mode.
FINE
Lights when the recording mode is set to FINE (best
quality).
5
2 3 (page 109)
Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed,
the remote control mode is 1).
SP
Lights when the recording mode is set to SP
(standard play).
6
REM
Lights when the character display is showing the
LP
remaining available recording time.
Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long
play).
7
(page 112)
Lights when the component video output is set to
progressive scan.
EP
Lights when the recording mode is set to EP
(extended play).
8
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded.
MN
Lights when the recording mode is set to MN
(manual recording level) mode.
23
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
12 Character display
1
ONE TOUCH COPY (page 72)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
13
(page 114)
Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast
are recorded.
2
Remote control indicator
Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a
TV (page 123) and when setting the remote control mode
(page 109).
14 VPS / PDC (page 63)
Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a
VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.
3
ꢆ STANDBY/ON
15 NTSC
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
Lights when playing NTSC format video.
4
ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE
16 OVER (page 114)
Press to open/close the disc tray.
Lights when the analog audio input level is too high.
5
HDD (page 31)
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording or
playback.
Remote control
6
DVD (page 31)
Press to select the DVD for recording or playback.
7
GUIDE Plus+ Action buttons and DVD playback
1
2
ONE TOUCH
COPY
STANDBY/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
functions
3
5
7
4
6
When in the GUIDE Plus+ system, these buttons act as
the Red, Green, Yellow and Blue Action buttons (the
functions of these buttons change according to the
GUIDE Plus+ Area. (page 40)
HDD
DVD
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
ANGLE
PLAY MODE
ABC
DEF
GUIDE
8
INPUT
GHI
PQRS
+
JKL
MNO
AUDIO (page 33, 58, 58)
SELECT
10
9
Changes the audio language or channel. (When the
recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner
audio.)
TUV
WXYZ
CHANNEL
CLEAR
CLEAR
11
14
12
13
PLAY LIST
MENU
DISC NAVIGATOR
TOP MENU
SUBTITLE (page 58)
Displays/changes the subtitles included in
multilingual DVD-Video discs.
ENTER
15
16
HOME
MENU
RETURN
ANGLE (page 59)
Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle
scenes.
17
REV SCAN
PLAY
FWD SCAN
PAUSE
STOP OK
BACK CM SKIP
PLAY MODE (page 55)
Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features
such as search, repeat and program play).
18
CASE
PREV
REC
NEXT
STEP / SLOW
SELECTION
REC MODE
TIMER REC
STOP REC
19
20
8
GUIDE (page 40)
NAVI
CHP
MARK
MARK
INFO
DISPLAY
TV / DVD
Press to display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
TV CONTROL
21
23
9
Alphanumeric buttons and CLEAR
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
22
CHANNEL VOLUME
DVD RECORDER
SELECT
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection;
channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also
be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on.
Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again.
10 INPUT SELECT (page 67)
Press to change the input to use for recording.
11 CHANNEL +/– (page 33)
Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.
12 +
Use to input symbols when entering names for titles,
discs and so on.
24
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controls and displays
03
13 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 51, 86) / TOP MENU
(page 35)
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top
menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded.
19 Recording controls (page 32)
ì REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in blocks of 30 mins.
14 PLAY LIST (page 86, 94) / MENU (page 35)
Press to switch between Original and Play List content on
VR mode discs, or display the disc menu if a DVD-Video
disc is loaded.
ꢀ STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
REC MODE (page 61)
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode
(picture quality).
When in the GUIDE Plus+ system, use to jump directly
to the Menu bar.
TIMER REC (page 45)
Press to go directly to the Schedule area of the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
15 ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to
select the currently highlighted option.
20 NAVI MARK (page 52)
16 HOME MENU (page 37)
Press to select a thumbnail picture for the current
title for use in the Disc Navigator screen.
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can
navigate all the functions of the recorder.
CHP MARK (page 91)
17 RETURN
Press to insert a chapter marker when playing/
recording a VR mode DVD-RW disc or the HDD.
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or
display.
INFO (page 41)
18 Playback controls (page 34)
Press to display additional TV program information
in GUIDE Plus+.
ꢈ REV SCAN / FWD SCAN ꢉ (page 53)
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press
again to change the speed.
DISPLAY (page 37)
Displays/changes the on-screen information
displays.
ꢅ PLAY
Press to start playback.
21 TV/DVD (page 33)
ꢊ PAUSE
Press to pause playback or recording.
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the
picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’,
in which you get picture and sound from the recorder’s
tuner (or an external input).
ꢄ STOP
Press to stop playback.
22 TV CONTROL (page 123)
After setting up, use these controls to control your TV.
CM BACK (commercial back)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward
through the audio or video playing.
23 TV DIRECT REC (page 63)
Press to start recording whatever channel your TV is set
to.
CM SKIP (commercial skip)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward
through the audio or video playing.
ꢋ PREV / NEXT ꢌ
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/
track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu
page.
When in the GUIDE Plus+ system, use to display the
previous/next page of TV listings information.
ꢍ STEP/SLOW ꢎ (page 54)
During playback, press to start slow-motion
playback; while paused, press to show the previous
or next video frame.
When in the GUIDE Plus+ system, use to display TV
listings information for the previous/next day.
25
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Chapter 4
Getting started
1
Switch on your TV and set the video input to this
recorder.
Switching on and setting up
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you
can make several basic settings using the Setup
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video and audio
output settings.
2
Press the ꢆ STANDBY/ON button on the remote
control or the front panel to switch on.
When you switch on for the first time, your TV should
display the Setup Navigator screen. (If the Setup
Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the
Initial Setup menu; see page 109).
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting
to use the recorder.
• If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using
a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will
take a few seconds to download country, TV screen
size and language information. (Check the manual
that came with your TV for compatibility information.)
STANDBY/ON
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ(cursor up/down) buttons to choose
a language, then press ENTER.
Initial Setup
Language
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
On S
Front
Powe
Remo
AV Li
English
français
Deutsch
Italiano
Español
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup
4
Press ENTER to start setting up using the Setup
ENTER
Navigator.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Clock
Complete this setup before you
Input
start using your recorder.
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On S
Front
Powe
Remo
AV Li
Start
Cancel
Please use the Initial Setup if you
want to make more detailed settings.
Setup
• If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press ꢁ
(cursor down) to select Cancel, then press ENTER to
exit the Setup Navigator.
5
Select the Auto Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or
‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do not set’, then press
ENTER.
DVD RECORDER
Initial Setup
Auto Channel Setting
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Remo
AV Li
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto Scan
Download from TV
Do not set
Setup
26
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
• Select Do not set if you want to skip setting up the
channels (because they have already been set up, for
example).
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
that broadcasts a time signal, then move the
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
• You can only use the Download from TV feature if
you connected this recorder to your TV using a
fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable connected to the
AV1(RGB)-TV connector, and if your TV supports this
function (check your TV’s instruction manual for
more details).
Initial Setup
Auto Clock Setting
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
Date
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On Sc
Time
Front
Powe
Pr 1
Clock Set CH
Remo
AV Li
Start
Setup
•
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to
choose your country, then press ENTER.
The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After
you see that the time has been set, select Next to
proceed.
Initial Setup
Country Selection
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Remo
AV Li
Country
UK
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Initial Setup
Auto Clock Setting
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
Date
THU 01
11
01
20
2004
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On Sc
Setup
Time
Front
Powe
Pr 1
Clock Set CH
Remo
AV Li
Start
Next
•
Auto-tuning channels
Setup
The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the
channel presets.
If the time could not be set automatically, press
RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select
Manual.
Tuning
32/107
Cancel
•
Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
•
Downloading channels from your TV
signals, you can set the clock manually.
Use the Download from TV option to download all the
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to set
your time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
channels that your TV is tuned to.
Downloading
Pr 5
to GMT.
Cancel
Initial Setup
6
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, or
Basic
Tuner
Clock
M
anual Clock Setting
1/2
Input
‘Manual’ to set the clock manually, then press
ENTER.
England
London
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On Sc
Time Zone
Front
Powe
Off
Summer Time
Remo
AV Li
Setup
Initial Setup
Clock Setting
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Press ꢁ (cursor down) then use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor
left/right) buttons to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for
summer time, then press ENTER.
Auto
Manual
Remo
AV Li
Setup
Select On if you are currently using summer time.
•
Auto clock setting
Initial Setup
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together
with the program. This recorder can use these
signals to set the clock automatically.
Basic
Tuner
Clock
M
anual Clock Setting
1/2
Input
England
London
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On Sc
Time Zone
Front
Powe
On
Summer Time
Remo
AV Li
Setup
27
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then
press ENTER to make all the settings.
9
Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select
‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
Manual Clock Setting
Clock
Basic
Tuner
2/2
Basic
Tuner
Clock
Input
On Sc
Input
Setup is complete!
Date
THU 01
01
00
2004
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On Sc
Enjoy using your DVD recorder!
Front
Front
Powe
Time
00
Finish Setup
Go Back
Powe
Remo
Austria
Vienna
Time Zone
Remo
AV Li
Setup
AV Li
On
Summer Time
Setup
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to change
the value in the highlighted field.
That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to move
Other settings you can make
from one field to another.
After setting up using the Setup Navigator, you should be
ready to start enjoying your DVD recorder. It’s possible,
however, that you may want to make a couple of
additional settings, depending on how the recorder is set
up for terrestrial TV broadcasts.
• You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in
the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN.
7
Select the TV screen type, ‘Wide (16:9)’ or
‘Standard (4:3)’.
• Manual channel setting – This setting lets you skip
channels where there is no station, as well as
manually tune to stations. See Manual CH Setting on
page 110.
Initial Setup
TV Screen Size
Clock
Basic
Tuner
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
• Setting up the remote to control your TV – You can set
up the supplied remote control to control many
brands of TV. See Setting up the remote to control your
TV on page 123.
Wide (16:9)
Standard (4:3)
Remo
AV Li
Setup
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to select, then
press ENTER.
8
Is your TV compatible with progressive scan
video?
Initial Setup
Basic
Progressive
Clock
Tuner
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Remo
AV Li
Video Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Compatible
Not Compatible
Don't Know
Setup
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
Compatible, Not Compatible, or Don’t Know, then
press ENTER.
• Note that progressive scan video is only output
through the AV1(RGB)-TV connector and the
component video outputs.
28
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
Postal Code.
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system
™
The GUIDE Plus+ system is a free, interactive on-
screen television programming guide. The system offers
program listings for all major channels, one-touch
recording, search by genre, recommendations according
to your profile and more.
For GUIDE Plus+ to function correctly, it is important
that you set the language and country correctly in the
Setup Navigator, and that you have performed a scan for
available channels, as these are all used by the GUIDE
Plus+ system. If any of these things are not yet set,
please run the Setup Navigator first (see Switching on
and setting up on page 26).
TV listings information is received via ‘host channels’. In
order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
The initial download can take up to 24 hours, but once
this is done, all future updates are automatic.
3
Use the number and cursor buttons to enter your
postal code.
GUIDE
CHANNEL
ENTER
The system uses your postal code to identify which TV
listings data is correct for the area in which you live, so it
is important that you enter it correctly.
4
If you are using an external receiver (such as a
satellite receiver) with the supplied G-LINK cable,
complete this step, otherwise jump to step 5 below.
1
Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ setup
menu.
• See Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or
digital terrestrial receiver on page 16 for more on using
the supplied G LINK cable.
The language and country settings are already set to
whatever you selected in the Setup Navigator.
29
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
• Select External Receiver 1, 2 or 3, then press
ENTER. (If you have just one external receiver, use
External Receiver 1. You can add further setups in 2
and 3 if you need to.)
B If you are using an external receiver, you need to
identify the host channel from the table below:
Country/
Region
Host channels
Comments
After pressing ENTER:
Austria
Eurosport
• Select your reception method (Terrestrial, Cable or
Satellite).
Belgium
(Flemish)
Music Factory (TMF)
• Select your provider (if applicable).
France
Germany
Italy
Canal+
Analog only
Analog only
• Select the brand of your external receiver.
• Identify which input your external receiver is
connected to.
Eurosport
Sport Italia
After completing these steps the recorder will try and
communicate with your external receiver and change the
channel via the G-LINK cable. If the channel was
successfully changed, select Yes to confirm.
Netherlands Music Factory (TMF), Use TMF if you live in
Eurosport
Amsterdam, Eindhoven or
Rotterdam.
Spain
Tele 5
Analog only
If the channel did not change, select No. The GUIDE
Plus+ system will try other codes assigned to your
external receiver. If none of the codes changes the
channel successfully, tune your external receiver to the
host channel for your country (refer to step 5 below) and
leave it on overnight. The recorder needs to be in standby.
It will wake up automatically and download new codes
from the host channel. The next day, try this setup
process again:
Switzerland Eurosport
UK ITV, Eurosport
ITV is analog only. Use
Eurosport if you are a SKY
subscriber and you no longer
have a terrestrial antenna.
• Tune your external receiver to the appropriate host
channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in
standby overnight.
• Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ setup
menu.
C If you use both an external receiver and this recorder
as sources, follow the instructions above for setting up
without an external receiver. Only if this is unsuccessful
try the external receiver method.
• Press ꢀ (cursor up) to highlight the Menu bar, then
use ꢃ (cursor right) to reach the Setup area and
select Setup.
• Continue setting up from the start of this step again.
About EPG download
If your external receiver still doesn’t respond to the G-
LINK controller, please call customer support and report
the brand and model of your external receiver.
• EPG data can only be received when the recorder is
in standby. (When not using the recorder, therefore,
please switch it into standby.) If you’re using an
external receiver, leave this on when EPG data is
downloadng.
See also GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting on
page 49.
5
Identify the host channel for your country.
• If you cannot receive any of the host channels (see
the above table) then you won’t be able to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system. In this case do not set the
postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ setup screen. (When
GUIDE Plus+ service starts in your area, set the
postal code again.)
The TV listings information available in GUIDE Plus+ is
distributed throughout Europe by selected broadcasters
called host channels. It is important that the host
channel for your country is correctly identified in order to
receive listings information (EPG download).
A If you are not using an external receiver, this recorder
will automatically scan all channels for the host channel:
• Even if you can’t use the EPG functions where you
live, you can still set VIDEO Plus+ timer recordings
and manual recordings — see page 47.
• Leave the recorder in standby overnight (do not leave
it switched on).
• The front panel display shows EPG when receiving
data. If you power on the recorder during an EPG
download, the download is canceled.
• EPG data may be received several times a day. All
updates are automatic.
• When downloading EPG data, the recorder may
sound as though it is on. This is normal.
30
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
2
Use the number buttons to change the program
Checking the downloaded data the
following day
numbers as you like.
1
Press GUIDE.
3
When you’re done, press the BLUE Action button
(Home) to get back to the GUIDE Plus+ home screen.
• You can find detailed information on using the GUIDE
Plus+ system in the next chapter, Using the GUIDE
Plus+™ electronic program guide on page 40.
You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV
listings information. Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down)
buttons to review the list. If you notice that there are
channels missing, or that there are channels in the list
that you don’t get, go to the Editor screen:
• Press ꢀ (cursor up) repeatedly until the Menu bar is
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for
playback and recording
highlighted.
• Press ꢃ(cursor right) until Editor is highlighted. The
main area of the screen now shows a list of channels.
Those that are turned ON are displayed in the grid;
those that are OFF are hidden. Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ
(cursor) buttons to move down the list and turn
channels ON or OFF as necessary.
The HDD and DVD buttons (remote control and front
panel) are used to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for
playback and recording. The indicator in the front panel
display shows which is currently selected.
• For any channel that you turn ON, the GUIDE Plus+
system will need to know how it is received (the
source) and on which program number. The source
may be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or an
external receiver. The program number is the number
on which the channel can be found on its receiving
device/source. The entry in the Editor screen must
match this number for correct recording of that
channel.
HDD
DVD
• The above is especially important for the ‘host
channel’. Please make sure that the host channel is
always switched ON.
31
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
3
4
Press ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.
Making your first recording
Load a blank DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with the
This quick guide shows you how to make a basic
recording of a TV program on either the HDD, or to a
recordable DVD.
label side face-up, using the disc guide to align the
disc.
• When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc, the
recorder will take a moment to initialize it for
recording.
Recording is covered in much more detail in chapter 7
(Recording).
5
Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to select the TV
channel you want to record from.
• You can also use the +/– buttons on the front panel if
the recorder is stopped.
STANDBY/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
• Channel presets are numbered 1–99.
HDD
DVD
• If the recorder is connected to your TV using a SCART
cable and your TV supports Direct Recording, it’s
possible to quickly start recording whatever channel
your TV is tuned to. See Direct recording from TV on
page 63 for detailed instructions.
CHANNEL
6
7
Press ì REC to start recording.
• By default, the recording will be in SP (standard play)
mode, which will give you around two hours of
recording from a blank DVD disc.
• You can pause recording by pressing ꢊ PAUSE.
Press ì REC or ꢊ PAUSE again to restart recording.
PLAY
When you want to stop recording, press
ꢀ STOP REC.
PAUSE
REC
STOP
Playing back your recording
STOP REC
The TV program you just recorded should be on the HDD
or DVD disc as a single title with one or more chapters.
•
Press ꢅ PLAY to start playback.
If you want to stop playback before the end of the
recording, press ꢄ STOP.
DVD RECORDER
1
If they aren’t already on, switch on your TV and
this recorder.
Press ꢆ STANDBY/ON to switch on.
• Make sure that the video input on your TV is set to this
recorder.
2
Press HDD to record to the HDD, or DVD to record
to a recordable DVD.
If you choose to record to the HDD, skip to step 5 now.
32
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also
select the language.
Using the built-in TV tuner
NICAM A
Regular
NICAM B
Changing TV channels
NICAM A+B
1
There are three different ways to select TV channels.
Note that you can’t change the TV channel during
playback, recording or during recording standby.
• You can also select the language for a non-NICAM
bilingual broadcast.
A (L)
B (R)
A + B (L+R)
• When watching a recording made from an external
input with Bilingual recording selected (see External
Audio on page 114), you can switch the audio
CHANNEL
2
channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R).
L
R
ENTER
L+R
Switching between TV and DVD
• CHANNEL +/– buttons on the remote
When the recorder is stopped or recording you can
choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in
TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’),
or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV
mode’).
• Number buttons on the remote – For example, to
select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34,
press 3, 4, ENTER.
• +/– buttons on the front panel
During playback or when a menu is being displayed on-
screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV
and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting.
Changing audio channels
You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or
external input signal.
Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV
using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.
AUDIO
TV / DVD
•
Press AUDIO to change the audio.
The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.
• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on
page 113) is set to NICAM and you are watching a
NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM
and Regular (non-NICAM) audio.
DVD RECORDER
•
Press TV/DVD to switch between TV mode and
DVD mode.
NICAM
Regular
Note
1 Channel presets are numbered 1–99.
2 When recording to the HDD, or in Video mode, or in VR mode using the FINE/MN32 setting, only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is re-
corded. In this case, decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see Bilingual Re-
cording on page 114).
33
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Basic playback
04
5
Press ꢅ PLAY to start playback.
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc
menu may appear when you start playback. Use the
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor) buttons and ENTER to navigate
DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and
ENTER for Video CD menus.
This section shows you how to use your recorder for
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of
video from the HDD. More playback features, such as
repeat and program play, are covered in the next chapter.
• When playing video from the HDD, playback will
automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.
Important
• See the following sections for more details on playing
specific kinds of discs.
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means
playback-only DVD-Video discs and DVD-R/RW. If a
function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it
is specified.
6
7
To stop playback, press ꢄ STOP.
When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.
• To open/close the disc tray, press ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE.
Remove the disc before putting the recorder into
standby.
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This
is not a malfunction.
• Press ꢆ STANDBY/ON to switch the recorder into
standby.
STANDBY/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
ꢆ
HDD
DVD
ENTER
PLAY
STOP
1
Press ꢆ STANDBY/ON to switch on.
Also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the
correct video input.
2
Press HDD to playback from the HDD, or DVD to
play a DVD.
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 5 below.
3
Press ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.
4
Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-
sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to
play face down).
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read
the note on page 36.
34
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Playing DVD discs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.
Playing from the HDD
The table below shows the basic playback controls when
playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).
PLAY
PLAY
Press to start playback.
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-
back starts from the place last stopped.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-
back starts from the place last stopped.
Playback automatically stops after the end
of a title is reached.
STOP
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing ꢅ PLAY. (Press ꢄ STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
STOP
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing ꢅ PLAY. (Press ꢄ STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
when paused.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(You can also use the front panel +/– but-
tons to do this during playback.)
to increase the scanning speed.
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(You can also use the front panel +/– but-
tons to do this during playback.)
Except VR mode: During playback, enter a
chapter number then press ENTER to skip
directly to that chapter within the currently
playing title.
On some discs, you can also use the num-
ber buttons to select numbered items in
the disc menu.
During playback, enter a title number then
press ENTER to skip directly to that title.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
CLEAR
ENTER
CLEAR
VR mode only: During playback, enter a
title number then press ENTER.
All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry
and start again.
ENTER
BACK CM SKIP
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips
backward/forward progressively up to a
maximum of 10 minutes forward or three
minutes back.
BACK CM SKIP
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips
backward/forward progressively up to a
maximum of 10 minutes forward or three
minutes back.
STEP/SLOW
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
ꢍ
ꢎ
STEP/SLOW
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
ꢍ
ꢎ
Press to display the ‘top’ menu or menu of
a DVD-Video disc (these are often the
same).
TOP MENU
MENU
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-
Video disc menus; press ENTER to select
items.
ENTER
RETURN
Press to return to the previous level of a
DVD-Video disc menu.
35
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
Video CD/Super VCDs.
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
1
2
audio CDs , and WMA/MP3 files.
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you
PLAY
Press to start playback.
Press to stop playback.
3
can select what to watch.
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY
Press to start playback.
Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-
screen, playback starts from the place last
stopped.
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
CD and MP3 only: Press to start scanning.
Press again to increase the scanning
speed. (There are two scan speeds; the
current scan speed is shown on-screen.)
STOP
Press to stop playback.
Video CD only: You can resume playback
from the same point by pressing ꢅ PLAY.
(Press ꢄ STOP again to cancel the resume
function.)
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next track (or
folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (You can also
use the front panel +/– buttons to do this
during playback.)
PAUSE
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
During playback, enter a track number
then press ENTER to skip directly to that
track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
to increase the scanning speed.
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next track. (You
can also use the front panel +/– buttons to
do this during playback.)
CLEAR
When a PBC menu is displayed, press to
display the previous/next page.
ENTER
During playback, enter a track number
then press ENTER to skip directly to that
track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
CLEAR
While a PBC menu screen is displayed,
use to select numbered menu items.
ENTER
BACK CM SKIP
Video CD only: Each press skips backward/
forward progressively up to a maximum of
10 minutes forward or three minutes back.
Note that this function doesn’t work when
playing in PBC mode.
STEP/SLOW
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
ꢍ
ꢎ
While paused, press to advance a single
frame (forward direction only).
RETURN
Press to display the disc menu of a Video
CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.
Note
1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise
will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels
on page 58).
2 Scanning doesn’t work with WMA tracks.
3 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not available. You can play a PBC Video
CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by pressing ꢌ to start playback instead of ꢅ PLAY.
36
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
Using the Home Menu
Displaying disc information on-
From the Home Menu screen you can access all the
screen
1
features of the recorder. Press HOME MENU to display
You can display various on-screen information about the
the Home Menu screen:
2
disc loaded or the HDD.
GUIDE Plus+
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
HDD
DVD
Easy Timer
Disc History
PhotoViewer
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor) buttons followed by ENTER
to select the option you want. To exit the Home Menu,
press HOME MENU.
ENTER
HOME
MENU
DISPLAY
Home menu options
GUIDE Plus+ (page 40)
Disc Setup (page 102)
1
Press DISPLAY repeatedly to display/change the
Disc Navigator (page 51, Initial Setup (page 107)
page 86)
on-screen information.
• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the
status of just the currently selected playback/
recording device (HDD or removable disc).
Copy (page 71)
Video/Audio Adjust
(page 104)
Easy Timer (page 64)
Play Mode (page 55)
• The on-screen display automatically disappears after
150 minutes.
Disc History (page 99)
PhotoViewer (page 100)
2
To hide the information display, press DISPLAY
repeatedly until it disappears.
The example displays below are a guide only; actual
displays vary according to the disc loaded, etc.
Note
1 Some options in the Home Menu may be grayed out sometimes, indicating that they are not available at the present time. For example, the
PhotoViewer option is grayed out unless there is a disc loaded that contains JPEG image files.
2 • The Video mode disc displays become the same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.
• Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that the broadcast TV program contains
copy control information.
37
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
4
Resume
HDD and removable disc activity display
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD and DVD buttons to
switch between the two kinds of display.
Shows Resume if playback can be resumed from the last
place stopped.
5
Recording time remaining
The example displays below show high-speed copying
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.
Shows the approximate recording time left on the disc in
the current recording mode.
6
Preset name or number
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
Shows the preset name or preset number for the
currently selected channel.
HDD
DVD-RW Video
Remain 10h35m
Stop
Hi-Speed Copy
0h08m left
Remain –h––m
Stop
7
Audio mode
Shows the broadcast audio mode for the current channel
preset (Mono, Stereo, etc.).
8
Copy control information
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
Shows recording restrictions of the current channel
program.
HDD
DVD-RW Video
Remain 10h35m
Chase Play
Rec
Remain 0h52m
Stop
9
Disc name
Shows the disc name.
(For CDs, this area shows playable files other than CD
audio tracks; for example, Multi-format: WMA/MP3.)
Recording time
10 Finalized
Shows Finalized if a recordable DVD is finalized.
Relative playback position
11 TV/DVD mode
Shows the current mode of the recorder (see Switching
between TV and DVD on page 33).
Stop display 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Stop display 2
ꢄStop
ABC
DVD-RW VR
Original
Resume
FINE (1h00m/DVD)
Finalized
Stereo
Copy Once
1
2
Rem. 0h35m
ꢄStop
DVD-RW VR
Original
ABC
Stereo
Copy Once
Disc Name
: Comedy shows
DVD Mode
14:52 MON 15/11/2004
9 10
DVD-RW Original / Play List
11
Titles
Lock Disc
: Original 99
: On
Play List 15
1
TV Mode
If a VR mode disc is loaded, this shows whether playback
is currently set to Original or Play List.
1
2
Date and time
Number of titles/tracks on disc
During preview playback of the Copy List, this shows
Copy List.
For a VR mode DVD-RW, the number of Original and Play
List titles are shown separately.
2
Disc type and mode
Shows the disc type (HDD, DVD-R, DVD-RW, CD, etc.),
and the disc mode for recordable DVD, if applicable (VR
or Video).
3
Recording mode and time
Shows the current recording mode (FINE, SP, LP, etc.),
and the total recording time of the disc.
38
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
04
3
Play display 1
Recording display
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
ꢅPlay
DVD-R Video Chapters 15
Title Total 0. 11. 52
3–2
0. 00. 15
ìRec
DVD-R Video
3
0. 00. 15
22:00
ABC
Stereo
Copy Once
21:00
–
FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem.
0h35m
Title Name
: 21/11 Football match
DVD Mode
DVD Mode
1
2
Number of chapters in title
5
Current title and chapter number
1
2
3
Current title number
(For CD/Video CD/Super VCD, shows current track; for
WMA/MP3, shows current folder and track; for JPEG
disc, shows current folder and file.)
Elapsed recording time
Timer recording start and stop times
Shows the start and stop times if the current recording is
a timer recording.
1
3
Elapsed title time
(For CD, WMA, MP3, Super VCD, shows elapsed track
time; for Video CD, shows elapsed disc time.)
4
Remaining recording time available
Shows the amount of space left on the disc in the current
recording mode.
4
5
Total running time of title
Angle indicator
5
Recording mode
Lights during multi-angle scenes.
Shows the current recording mode (FINE, SP, LP, etc.),
and the total recording time of the disc.
Play display 2
1
2
3
4
5
ꢅPlay
3–2
0. 00. 15
!
DVD-R Video Chapter Time 0. 00. 21
Chapter Total 0. 01. 52
ꢊꢊꢊꢊꢊꢊꢊ
4.32Mbps
Hi-Speed Copy
Title Name
: 21/11 Football match
1
Chase playback, simultaneous record/playback,
copy, disc back-up
Indicates that recording, copying or back-up is in
progress.
2
3
Elapsed chapter time
Total running time of chapter
2
4
Data transfer rate
Shows the current data rate being read from the disc.
5
Copy protected material (!)
Shows ‘!’ if the playback material is copy-once protected.
Note
1 The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time display when the disc is paused.
2 Data transfer rate shows the amount of video and audio information recorded on the disc. It is not an indication of picture/audio quality.
3 • When using the simultaneous play and record feature, the display shows information for playback only.
• During real-time copy, the copy source playback information is displayed.
• The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis is calculated based on a 12cm/4.7GB disc at the displayed record setting.
• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This is because of the slightly different
frame rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD.
39
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
Chapter 5
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic
program guide
The GUIDE Plus+ System
The GUIDE Plus+ system* is a free, interactive on-
screen television programming guide. The system offers
program listings for all major channels, one-touch
recording, search by genre, recommendations according
to your profile and more. The GUIDE Plus+ system is a
convenient way to find out what's on right now or during
the coming week, by channel or by genre. The GUIDE
Plus+ system also allows you to automatically set your
viewing and recording selections quickly and easily.
Using GUIDE Plus+
™
All the various features and areas of GUIDE Plus+ are
color-coded for ease of navigation. All screens (with the
exception of some setup screens) have the following
common elements:
1
Action bar
Information
Video
box
window
Menu bar
In order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
If you haven’t already done this, please turn to Setting up
the GUIDE Plus+ system on page 29 before proceeding.
Grid
Panel
ads
* GUIDE Plus+, ShowView, VIDEO Plus+, G-LINK are (1)
registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured
under license from and (3) subject of various international
patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to,
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related
affiliates.
• Grid – Displays TV listings information for the next
seven days by channel and time.
• Menu bar – Gives access to the various areas of
GUIDE Plus+.
• Information box – Shows short program
descriptions or help menus.
Legal Notice
• Action bar – Color-coded Action buttons change
function depending on the area.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE
ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION
PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE
GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
• Video window – Allows you to continue watching
the current program while using GUIDE Plus+.
• Panel ads – Display program promotions or
instructions on the GUIDE Plus+ system.
Note
1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line System on page 108).
40
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
Navigating GUIDE Plus+
Key
What it does
The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons
you’ll use to navigate the GUIDE Plus+ system.
ENTER
Press to confirm a selection or to leave
the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
Number buttons Use for numeric entry.
ꢋ / ꢌ
Press to select the previous/next page
of information (in the grid, for
example).
ꢍ / ꢎ
Press to select the previous/next day.
GUIDE
One-Button-Record
The RED Action button (Record) is visible anytime you
can highlight a program title, including from the Grid,
after a search, or in your recommendations in the My TV
area.
MENU
The program name, date, channel, recording start and
end times are all set automatically when you set a timer
recording using One-Button-Record. You can edit the
settings if you want to anytime before the recording is
due to start (see Editing a scheduled recording on
page 45).
ENTER
1
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to highlight a
PREV
NEXT
STEP / SLOW
program title.
TIMER REC
INFO
DVD RECORDER
Key
What it does
Press to access GUIDE Plus+ (also
use to exit GUIDE Plus+).
GUIDE
2
Press the RED Action button (Record).
The program is now set for recording. When the program
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ
Use to navigate screens (highlight an
item).
is due to start, the recorder will switch to the correct
1
channel and start recording .
RED, GREEN,
YELLOW, BLUE
Action buttons that change
functionality depending on the Area.
• You can review the shows you have set to record in
the Schedule Area (see also The Schedule Area on
page 45).
MENU
Press to jump directly to the Menu bar.
TIMER REC
Press to go directly to the Schedule
area.
Press to display extended information
for the current program.
INFO
Note
1 Please note that recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in
the program broadcast schedules.
41
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
Lock / Unlock video window
When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system, the channel
you were watching remains visible in the video window.
The date stamp above the window lets you know the
channel, date and time.
Areas
The GUIDE Plus+ system consists of seven Areas. All
Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar.
• Grid – The GUIDE Plus+ Home Area. Displays TV
listings information for the next seven days by time
and channel.
The default setting for this window is ‘locked’, as
indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video
window. When locked, the video window always shows
the channel you were previously watching as you move
up and down through the listings grid.
• Search – Search for TV programs by category (eg.,
Sport), subcategory (eg., Football) or keyword.
• My TV – Set up a profile and receive
recommendations according to your preferences.
If you prefer, you can unlock the video window so that as
you highlight different channels in the listings grid, the
current program showing on that channel is shown in
the video window.
• Schedule – Shows all scheduled recordings.
• Info – Area for additional information, such as
weather (not available in all regions).
1
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to highlight a
• Editor – Change channel settings.
channel logo.
• Setup – Setup the GUIDE Plus+ system.
The Grid Area
The Grid screen is the main TV listings screen of GUIDE
Plus+ and is the first screen that you see when you press
GUIDE. You can see TV listings for the next seven days,
starting with the current day.
When you highlight a program in the Grid, you can see
information about it in the Information Box, including
title, synopsis, channel, source, time and length. If there
is an i symbol in the Information Box, it means that there
is an extended synopsis available. Press the INFO button
to see it.
In some countries, you can also see a rating for a
particular program (mostly movies). These ratings are
provided by local partners, such as TV magazines.
Channel logos are displayed to the left of program titles.
2
Press the RED Action button (Unlock).
The padlock icon above the video window becomes
unlocked. It remains unlocked for the remainder of your
current TV viewing session.
From the Grid Area you can:
• View and scroll through program listings
• Read program synopsis
If you want to lock the video window again, follow the
same procedure. The RED Action button will now act as
Lock.
1
• Tune to a program that’s currently showing
• Set a program to record
• Lock or unlock the video window.
• Access panel ads.
Channel mosaic screen
You can switch the display style of channels in Grid Area,
Schedule Area or My TV Area from a list to a mosaic of
channel icons by pressing the YELLOW Action button.
Select the channel icon you want using the cursor
buttons, then press ENTER to return to the previous
screen on that channel.
Note
1 If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds before it tunes to the channel
after selecting it. This is normal.
42
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
3
Press ENTER to start the search.
Browsing the Grid
Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid:
The search results are shown sorted by time and date.
• If no search results are displayed, it means there are
no programs for the current day that match your
search criteria.
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) – Navigate the Grid
ꢈ/ꢉ – Previous / next page
ꢍ/ꢎ – Previous / next day
BLUE Action button – Return to the current time/date in
the Grid.
Using My Choice keywords for a search
In addition to the standard categories, GUIDE Plus+ lets
you set your own keywords.
ENTER – Press on the current selection to exit GUIDE
Plus+ and start watching the program
1
Press ꢂ (cursor left) to access My Choice.
The Search Area
From the Search Area you can:
• Search by category
• Search by subcategory
• Search by keyword
• Read program synopsis
• Tune to a program that’s currently showing
• Set a program to record
• Access panel ads.
Searching
You can search for programs by category, subcategory or
by keyword (My Choice). Categories for searching
include Movies (purple), Sport (green), Children (blue)
and Others (teal). In some countries there is a further
subcatgory available called ‘Tip of the Day’. These are
programs recommended by a local partner, such as a TV
magazine.
2
Press the YELLOW Action button to add a
keyword.
3
Enter a keyword to appear in the menu.
1
Select ‘Search’ from the Menu bar.
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select a category
and a subcategory.
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you’re
finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and
continue.
4
Press ENTER to start a keyword search.
• You can delete or edit keywords using the RED and
GREEN Action buttons.
• If you choose All as the subcategory, all programs in
the category you selected will show up in the search
results.
• When you have set more than two keywords, an All
subcategory automatically appears which allows you
to search for all your keywords.
43
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and
press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels.
My TV Area
The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile.
You can define a profile by channels, themes and/or
keywords. As soon as a personal profile has been set,
GUIDE Plus+ continuously scans the TV listings for the
next seven days. Whenever you access the My TV Area, a
list of programs matching your profile appears.
4
To add a theme to your profile, highlight
‘Themes’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
From the My TV Area you can:
• Set up a profile by channel, theme and/or keyword.
• Edit and delete profiles.
• Read program synopsis
• Tune to a program that’s currently showing
• Set a program to record
• Access panel ads.
Setting up a profile
You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16
channels, four themes and 16 keywords.
Select a theme from the Search Area categories and
press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to four themes.
1
2
Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar.
5
To add a keyword to your profile, highlight
Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile.
‘Keywords’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
Channels is now highlighted.
To add a channel to your profile, press the
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you’re
finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and
continue.
3
YELLOW Action button.
6
Press ENTER to activate your profile.
• You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step 5.
• You can edit or delete your profile using the RED and
GREEN Action buttons.
44
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
4
Enter a name for the scheduled recording.
The Schedule Area
The Schedule Area is where you can set, see, edit and
delete scheduled (timer) recordings. (See also Setting a
timer recording on page 63 for further timer recording
features.)
From the Schedule Area you can:
• Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording.
• Set, edit or delete a VIDEO Plus+ recording.
• Set, edit or delete a manual recording.
Editing a scheduled recording
You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording, or
delete it if you no longer require it.
1
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard.
After entering the whole name, press the GREEN Action
button to continue.
5
Confirm the changes you’ve made.
• If you only want to edit the recording quality,
frequency, destination, timing or group settings, skip
to step 6 below.
2
3
Press the GREEN Action button (Edit).
Use the cursor and number buttons to edit the
Select Save to save your changes, or Don’t Save to exit
without changing anything, then press ENTER.
recording date, start time, end time and channel.
6
Highlight the right recording tile.
7
Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change
the recording quality.
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons or the number
buttons to edit.
Press the GREEN Action button to go to continue, or the
RED Action button to go back.
45
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
1
10 Press ꢃ (cursor right) to access the extended
recording options:
Select from AUTO , FINE, SP, LP, EP, SLP, or MN (if
manual recording is set to On.)
8
Press the GREEN Action button (Frequency) to
change the recording frequency.
• If you want to record to a particular HDD group, use
the YELLOW Action button (Group) to select a
group.
Select from the various options for one-time, daily and
weekly recordings.
• Use the GREEN Action button (Timing) to add extra
time to the end of the recording (+0, +10, +20, +30 or
3
9
Press YELLOW Action button (Destination) to
select the recording destination.
VPS/PDC (V–P)).
• Press ꢂ (cursor left) to display the standard
recording options again.
Deleting a scheduled recording
1
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
Select from DVD, HDD or HDDr (Auto Replace
2
Recording) .
• Auto Replace Recording is only available as an
option with regular daily or weekly recordings.
2
Press the RED Action button (Delete).
The scheduled event is deleted.
Note
1 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD.
2 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 117) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality then the Re-
covery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will
not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programs will be erased.
3 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to
work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.
• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.
• Up to 8 timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.
• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO.
46
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
Setting a VIDEO Plus™* recording
Setting a manual recording
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
2
3
Press the RED Action button (VIDEO Plus+).
Use the number buttons to enter a PlusCode
2
3
Press the GREEN Action button (Manual).
Use the number and ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to enter
programming number.
the recording date, then press the GREEN Action
button (Next).
• If you live in an area not yet covered by GUIDE Plus+
you may also have to input a channel number. Follow
the on-screen display to do this.
4
Press ENTER to confirm.
™
*
is a trademark of Gemstar Development
Corporation.
The VIDEO Plus+ system is manufactured under license
from Gemstar Development Corporation.
47
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
4
In the same way, enter the recording start time,
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
5
Enter the recording end time in the same way,
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
6
Use the number buttons to enter a channel
number, then press the GREEN Action button (Next)
to confirm.
2
Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you
want to switch on or off.
3
Press the RED Action button to switch the
channel on or off.
Changing the source and program number
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW Action button
(Mosaic) and use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select a
channel from the mosaic, followed by ENTER.
The Info Area
This area is reserved for additional information such as
news, weather reports, stock quotes, and so on, and
varies by region. (Note that this feature is not available in
all countries/regions.)
The Editor Area
The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage
your channels. Any changes you make here will affect
what is displayed in the Grid Area. The Editor Area is
mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to
make any manual changes as necessary.
2
Highlight the right channel tile of the channel
you want to make a change to.
3
Press the RED Action button to change the
You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become
available in your area, or if you change from cable to
satellite, say, or move house.
channel source, or the GREEN Action button to enter
a program number.
Each press of the RED Action button changes the
channel source (Tuner, Ext. Rec 1, etc.). To set a
program number, use the number buttons to enter a
program number then press ENTER. (When set to Tuner,
make sure that the program number matches the preset
number of this recorder for what you want to record).
From the Editor Area you can:
• Display/hide channels in the grid (switch the channel
on/off).
• Select a channel source (Tuner, Ext. Rec 1, Ext. Rec.
2, etc.).
• Enter a channel program number.
Switching a channel on/off
You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the
Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor
Area.
48
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
The Setup Area
The Setup Area is where you can set up GUIDE Plus+ for
your particular region, TV reception conditions, and so
on.
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and
troubleshooting
This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list
please consult the GUIDE Plus+ website at:
www.europe.guideplus.com
Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+ setup
1
Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar.
FAQ
• When I tried setting up my external receiver I could not
get any of the attempts to work, what should I do?
A: There could be several reasons why your external
receiver could not be controlled.
– The connections could be wrong. Make sure that
the G-LINK cable is connected to the G-LINK
connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in
front of the external receiver, pointing towards the IR
receiver of your external receiver. See Connecting to a
cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver
on page 16.
– The code that is listed under your brand could be
wrong. Please try other codes for your brand under
satellite, cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area and
choose one of the three options (cable, satellite or
terrestrial) that you have not already tried. Follow the
on-screen prompts to make sure that GUIDE Plus+
can change channels on your external receiver. If it
does not work, repeat the process, choosing different
reception and external receiver combinations until
you have tried all the codes for your brand of receiver
that are already in the GUIDE Plus+ system. If it still
does not work, see below on how to receive new
codes overnight.
2
Highlight the part you want to change.
– The unit has not yet received new codes. The nightly
data downloads frequently include new codes for
controlling external receivers. Please tune your
external receiver to your local host channel and leave
it on overnight. Switch this recorder into standby. The
next morning, please perform the GUIDE Plus+
setup again to see if your external receiver can now
be controlled.
1
You can change the Language, Country, Postal Code
and the External Receiver settings.
3
Press ENTER to confirm.
– The external receiver that you use is currently not
supported. If, after leaving your external receiver on
overnight, and doing the Reception and External
Receiver Setup again, it still does not respond, please
call Customer Support to report your brand and
model.
Note
1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information. This can take up to 24 hours.
49
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
• My external receiver was successfully setup. However
I have found that when the GUIDE Plus+ system has
to change to a channel with a 3-digit program number
in the external receiver's preset, it does not work. It
looks like the GUIDE Plus+ System can only send two
digits.
– For external receiver users only: The connections
and setup are OK, but the external receiver was not
tuned to the correct host channel. Check the list of
host channels (see step 5 of Setting up the GUIDE
Plus+ system on page 29) and leave the recorder in
standby and the external receiver on overnight tuned
to the correct host channel.
With the number of channels increasing, the number
of digits has increased as well. While older boxes use
only 2 digits, newer boxes require up to 4. It is
possible that you selected an older code for your
brand during set-up. Please access the Setup Area,
select External Receiver and repeat the setup for your
brand. (Note: Every time you see the on-screen
question about whether the receiver has changed to
a certain channel, GUIDE Plus+ has sent a different
code). Try all the different codes until your GUIDE
Plus+ system can control your external receiver
correctly. If you have no success, try to receive new
codes overnight.
– You live in a country/region where the GUIDE Plus+
system is not yet available. Check the list of countries
to see if you are in a region that is supported.
• I used the One-Button-Record feature (red Action
button) to set a recording, but I recorded the wrong
channel.
If the channel to be recorded is received via the
external receiver first make sure that the external
receiver was left switched on. Next, in the Editor
Area, make sure that the channel to be recorded is
correctly set: Access the Editor Area. Check the
source and program number of the channel that you
wanted to record. Change the source and preset
numbers if incorrect.
• I used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or
analog cable without a set-top box. Now, I have
“upgraded” to a satellite system or to digital cable with
external receiver. What should I do to receive data for
the GUIDE Plus+ system?
If you are recording from the recorder’s internal tuner
(the Tuner setting), make sure that the program
number is the same as the preset number set on this
recorder. If they are different, go to the Editor Area
and change the program number to match the
recorder’s preset number.
You can try to receive your host channel through your
new reception method. If you have problems to
receive data we recommend that you keep your
analog terrestrial or cable connection only to receive
data this way. It is important that you identify your
host channel correctly in the Editor Area.
• The TV listings information doesn’t update.
The latest TV listings information is automatically
downloaded by the recorder overnight. This only
happens if the recorder is in standby; if the recorder
is left on, it will not download. When not using the
recorder, please switch it into standby.
• After I performed the initial set-up I found that the line-
up for all the channels received via the external set top
box is incorrect. How do I correct this?
You can change the line-up in the editor according to
your preferences. Access the Editor Area. Select the
channels that you would like to change. Change the
source and preset number according to your
preferences.
Data downloads can take several hours. The front
panel display shows EPG when downloading. If you
switch the recorder on while EPG is displayed, the
download will be canceled.
• GUIDE Plus+ is not supported in my area, but when I
switch the recorder into standby, after a while the front
panel display shows EPG. Can I stop this from
happening?
• I performed the set-up but after many hours I still have
a blank EPG what is going wrong?
There are several possibilities:
– Connections are wrong. See Connecting up on
page 12 to double check everything.
If GUIDE Plus+ is not supported in your area, please
do not set the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ setup
(see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system on page 29).
When GUIDE Plus+ service starts in your area,
please set the postal code again.
– The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was completed
incorrectly. Try setting it up again (see Setting up the
GUIDE Plus+ system on page 29).
– Your cabling and setup is OK, but the recorder has
not been connected for enough time to receive the TV
listings data. Leave the recorder in standby overnight.
50
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
06
CPhlaapteyr b6 ack
Introduction
Using the Disc Navigator to browse
the contents of a disc.
Most of the features described in this chapter make use
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/
ꢃ (cursor buttons) and ENTER. To go back one level
from any screen, use the RETURN button. Remember
also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen
shows which buttons do what.
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc
and start playback.
HDD
DVD
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the
1
2
HDD, DVD discs , Video CDs , Super VCDs, WMA/MP3
discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some
varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. The following
icons are provided to help you quickly identify which
instructions you need for which kind of disc. (For discs
that contain JPEG picture files, see The PhotoViewer on
page 100.)
DISC NAVIGATOR
DVD
Any kind of DVD, DVD-R or DVD-RW
ENTER
HOME
MENU
DVD-Video
Commercially produced DVD or finalized
Video mode DVD-R/RW
Video mode
Video mode DVD-R/RW (unfinalized)
VR mode
VR mode DVD-RW
HDD
HDD (Hard disk drive)
Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only
CD
Audio CD
discs
3
DVD-Video
CD
Video CD
Super VCD WMA/MP3
Video CD
Video CD
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’
Super VCD
Super VCD
from the on-screen display.
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/
MP3 disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which takes
you straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
WMA/MP3
WMA or MP3 files
MP3
MP3 files
GUIDE Plus+
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
Easy Timer
Disc History
PhotoViewer
Note
1 Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction.
2 When playing Video CDs, some functions, such as making a program list, are not available in PBC mode. Stop the disc first, then start play-
back by pressing ꢌ.
3 It’s not possible to use the Disc Navigator when playing a Video CD in PBC mode.
51
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
06
2
Select what you want to play.
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to highlight items
and ENTER to select.
VR mode Video mode
HDD
Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc
Navigator looks slightly different.
When used with a recordable disc or the HDD, the Disc
Navigator gives you access to all the editing features of
this recorder as well as the ability to browse and play
titles. See also Editing on page 86 for more on editing
recordable discs.
The screen for DVD discs shows the titles on the left and
the chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter
within a title.
Disc Navigator
1
Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or
Title (1-10)
Title 01
Title 02
Title 03
Title 04
Title 05
Title 06
Title 07
Title 08
Chapter (1-003)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
the DVD drive.
DVD
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’
from the on-screen display.
Alternatively, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR to go
straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
3
Select ‘Play’ from the menu options.
The screen for CDs and Video CDs shows a list of tracks.
Press ENTER to move to the thumbnails area of the
screen.
Disc Navigator
Track (1-10)
Track 01
Track 02
Track 03
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06
Track 07
Track 08
Total Time 0.58.25
Disc Navigator
CD
Video Mode
DVD
1
2
3
6
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Play
Erase
4
5
Ttl Name
Lock
Erase All
The screen for WMA/MP3 discs shows a list of folders
and tracks. Select a folder or a track within a folder.
Undo
1/1
Disc Navigator
4
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select a
Folder (1-03)
01.Rock
02.Pop
Track (1-004)
001.Intro
002.Escape
WMA/MP3
title to play.
03.Dance
003.Everything You Say
004.What I Do
5
Press ENTER to start playback.
Changing the thumbnail picture for a title
VR mode Video mode
HDD
Playback starts after you press ENTER.
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears for
each title in the Disc Navigator screen using the NAVI
MARK button.
• For discs that contain both CD-Audio tracks and
WMA/MP3 tracks, you can switch the playback area
between CD and WMA/MP3. This can only be done
while the disc is stopped.
PLAY
PAUSE
STEP / SLOW
NAVI
MARK
52
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
06
1
Start playback of the title you want to change
VR mode
HDD
the thumbnail for.
1
During playback, use the number buttons to
2
Press NAVI MARK anywhere in the title to make
input a title number.
For example, for title 6, press 6; for title 24, press 2,
then 4.
the displayed picture the thumbnail for that title.
• For greater control over the exact frame you want to
use, you can use the ꢊ PAUSE and/or slow-motion/
frame advance/reverse controls (ꢍ /ꢎ).
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new title.
Navigating discs and the HDD
ALL
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
WMA/MP3
During playback you can easily jump to another title,
chapter or track on a disc using the number buttons on
the remote.
1
During playback, use the number buttons to
input a track number.
For example, for track 6, press 6; for track 24, press 2,
then 4.
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
CLEAR
CLEAR
will jump to the new track.
Scanning discs
ENTER
You can fast scan discs at various speeds, forwards or
1
backward.
DVD-Video Video mode
1
During playback use the number buttons to
REV SCAN
PLAY
FWD SCAN
enter a chapter number within the current title.
For example, for chapter 6, press 6; for chapter 24,
press 2, then 4.
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new chapter.
1
During playback, press ꢈ or ꢉ to start
reverse or forward scanning.
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
2
Press the same button repeatedly to increase the
scanning speed.
Note
1 • Depending on the disc, reverse playback may not be smooth.
• Sound can be heard while scanning audio CDs (analog output only).
• Scanning is not possible with WMA files.
• No subtitles are displayed while scanning DVD-Video discs.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
53
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
06
DVD
HDD
Frame advance/frame reverse
• Forward:
SCAN 1 ꢅ SCAN 2 ꢅ SCAN 3 ꢅ SCAN 4
1
DVD
HDD
Video CD
Super VCD
• Reverse:
You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc or the
HDD frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs, you
can only use frame advance.
3
Reverse play ꢅ SCAN 1 ꢅ SCAN 2 ꢅ SCAN 3
ꢅ SCAN 4
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
MP3
PLAY
• Forward/Reverse:
SCAN 1 ꢅ SCAN 2
PAUSE
3
To resume normal playback, press ꢅ PLAY.
STEP/SLOW
ꢍ
ꢎ
Playing in slow motion
1
2
During playback, press ꢊ PAUSE.
DVD
HDD
Video CD
Super VCD
Press ꢍ or ꢎ to back up or advance one frame.
• Hold down ꢍ or ꢎ for continuous frame reverse/
frame advance.
2
You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs
and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in
either direction, while Video CD/Super VCDs can only be
played forwards in slow motion.
3
To resume normal playback, press ꢅ PLAY.
PLAY
STEP/SLOW
ꢍ
ꢎ
1
Press ꢍ or ꢎ to start slow motion reverse or
forward playback.
2
Press the same button repeatedly to change the
slow motion speed.
SLOW 1/16
SLOW 1/2
SLOW 1/8
SLOW 1/4
3
To resume normal playback, press ꢅ PLAY.
Note
1 • Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output
from the optical digital output except during chase playback and simultaneous recording/playback.) No sound is output when using other scan
speeds.
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output during
forward
SCAN 1).
2 • The picture quality during slow motion playback is not as good as during normal playback and depends on the disc being played.
• Reverse slow-motion playback may not be as smooth as forward and may be better with some discs than others.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
• No sound is output during slow-motion playback.
3 • The picture quality when using frame reverse is not as good as frame advance.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
54
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
06
Search Mode
The Play Mode menu
ALL
ALL
The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a
specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/folder/
track number.
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search
functions, repeat and program play functions.
1
1
2
3
Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play Mode menu.
Select one of the search options.
PLAY MODE
Use the number buttons to enter a title/chapter/
folder/track number or the search time (in hours,
2
minutes & seconds) .
CLEAR
CLEAR
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Input Time
0.01.00
Program
ENTER
HOME
MENU
PLAY
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes
into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15
minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.
3
1
Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode menu
Time Search (Video CD) : For example, for 45 minutes into
screen.
the disc, press 4, 5, 0, 0.
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6,
press 6. Alternatively, you can use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/
down) buttons.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
4
Press ENTER.
Program
Tip
• You can often select what you want to watch on a
DVD disc from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP
MENU to display the disc menu.
• You can also access the Play Mode menu from the
Home Menu (press HOME MENU).
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) and ENTER
to navigate.
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or
PLAY MODE.
Note
1 You can’t use the Play Mode features with Video CD/Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed.
2 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.
3 Time search doesn’t work with Super VCDs.
55
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
06
A-B Repeat
VR mode
DVD
CD
Video CD
HDD
• For VR mode DVD discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat
Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off).
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is
played over and over.
1
DVD-Video Video mode
HDD
4
1
During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from the
• For HDD, DVD-Video and Video mode DVD discs,
select Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat
Off).
Play Mode menu.
2
With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press ENTER at
the point you want the loop to start.
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
Play Mode
• For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Repeat
Disc or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
A (Loop Start)
B (Loop End)
Off
Program
WMA/MP3
• For WMA/MP3 discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat
Folder or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).
After setting the loop start point, the highlight will
automatically move down to B(Loop End).
3
To resume normal playback, select ‘Repeat Off’
from the Repeat Play menu.
You can also press CLEAR to cancel repeat play if no
menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed.
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press ENTER at
2
the point you want the loop to end.
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and
plays the loop round and round.
Program play
DVD-Video
CD
Video CD
Super VCD WMA/MP3
4
To resume normal playback, select ‘Off’ from the
A-B Repeat menu.
You can also press CLEAR to cancel A-B Repeat play if no
menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed.
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/
chapters/folders/tracks on a disc.
1
Select ‘Program’ from the Play Mode menu.
Repeat play
2
Select ‘Input/Edit Program’ from the list of
program options.
ALL
There are various repeat play options, depending on the
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together
with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the
program list (see Program play below).
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Input/Edit Program
Start Program Play
Cancel Program Play
Erase Program List
Program
1
2
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.
3
Select a repeat play mode.
The Program edit screen that appears depends on the
kind of disc loaded.
Play Mode
On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a
list of titles (DVD), folders (WMA/MP3), or tracks (CD,
Video CD/Super VCDs). On the far right is a list of
chapters (DVD) or tracks (WMA/MP3).
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Repeat Disc
Repeat Title
Repeat Chapter
Repeat Off
Program
Note
1 • You can’t use A-B Repeat with WMA/MP3 or Super VCD discs.
• If you switch camera angles while using A-B Repeat with a DVD-Video disc, A-B repeat is canceled.
2 When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title.
3 If there is a program list, you can select Repeat Program to repeat the program list.
4 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.
56
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
06
3
Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the
4
Repeat step 3 to build up a program list.
current step in the program list.
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/
folders/tracks.
1
For a DVD disc, you can add a whole title, or a chapter
within a title to the program list.
5
To play the program list, press ꢅ PLAY.
• To add a title, select the title.
Program play remains active until you turn off program
play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject
the disc or switch off the recorder.
• To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press
ꢃ (cursor right)and select a chapter from the list.
Program
Step
Tip
Title (1-38)
Title 01
Title 02
Title 03
Title 04
Title 05
Title 06
Title 07
Title 08
Chapter (1-004)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Chapter 004
01. 01-003
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
• To save your program list and exit the program edit
screen without starting playback, press HOME
MENU or PLAY MODE.
• You can change the program list by selecting Input/
Edit Program from the Play Mode Program menu.
• During program play, press ꢌ to skip to the next
program step.
For a CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to
the program list.
• Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program
play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is
displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program
list.
Program
Step
01. 04
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Track (1-12)
Track 01
Track 02
Track 03
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06
Track 07
Track 08
Total Time 0.00.00
• You can use repeat play with program play. Start
playback of the program list then select Program
Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see
Repeat play on page 56).
For a WMA/MP3 disc, you can add a whole folder, or a
track within a folder to the program list.
Other Program play functions
As well as creating and editing a program list, you can
start program play, cancel program play, and erase the
program list from the Play Mode menu.
• To add a folder, select the folder.
• To add a track, first highlight the folder, then press ꢃ
(cursor right) and select a track from the list.
1
Press PLAY MODE and select ‘Program’ from the
list of functions on the left.
Program
2
Select a program play function.
• Input/Edit Program – See above
Step
01. 01-003
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Folder (1-06)
01. Pop
02. Electronic
03. Jazz
04. Indie
05. Rock
Track (1-010)
001. Track 01
002. Track 02
003. Track 03
004. Track 04
005. Track 05
006. Track 06
007. Track 07
008. Track 08
• Start Program Play – Starts playback of a saved
program list
06. Classic
• Cancel Program Play – Turns off program play, but
does not erase the program list
• Erase Program List – Erases the program list and
turns off program play
After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/
track, the step number automatically moves down one.
• To insert a step into the program list, highlight the
step number where you want to insert another step,
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move
down one.
• To delete a step from the program list, highlight the
step you want to delete, then press CLEAR.
Note
1 When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be sometimes be played, depending on
the disc.
57
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
06
Displaying and switching subtitles
Switching DVD soundtracks
DVD-Video
DVD-Video
Some DVD discs have subtitles in one or more
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which
subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle
When playing a DVD disc recorded with two or more
soundtracks (often in different languages), you can
switch the soundtrack during playback. Check the disc
2
1
language during playback. Check the disc packaging for
packaging for details of the soundtrack options.
details of the subtitle options.
To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language
To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on
on page 115.
page 116.
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
•
Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio
soundtrack.
CLEAR
Audio : 1/2
Dolby Digital 2/0CH
1
Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle
option.
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.
Subtitle: 1/2 English
Switching audio channels
VR mode
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
WMA/MP3
The toucan lives in tropical forests
For VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you
can switch between left (L) channel, right (R) channel, or
both (L+R).
2
To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then
3
CLEAR.
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right
channel.
Note
1 Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access.
2 • The sound may drop out for a few seconds when switching soundtracks.
• Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access.
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS
soundtrack, connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital output. See Connecting to an
AV amplifier/receiver on page 19 for connection details.
3 When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot
switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital ꢅ PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 114) or listen via the analog outputs
if you need to switch the audio channel.
58
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
06
Some Super VCD discs have two soundtracks. With
these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks
as well as individual channels in each.
Switching camera angles
DVD-Video
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or
more angles—check the disc box for details: it should be
AUDIO
marked with a
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon
appears on screen to let you know that other angles are
available (this can be switched off if you prefer—see
Angle Indicator on page 121).
1
To display/switch the audio channel, press
AUDIO repeatedly.
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-
screen.
ANGLE
VR mode
• L+R – Both channels (default)
• L – Left channel only
•
To switch the camera angle, press ANGLE.
• R – Right channel only
The angle number is displayed on-screen.
You can also change the angle from some DVD-Video
disc menus. Press TOP MENU to access.
CD
Video CD
WMA/MP3
• Stereo – Stereo (default)
• 1/L – Left channel only
• 2/R – Right channel only
• If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the
new angle.
• Repeat play is canceled if you change the angle while
repeat playback is active.
Super VCD
• 1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default)
• 1 L – Soundtrack 1 / Left channel
• 1 R – Soundtrack 1 / Right channel
• 2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2 / Stereo
• 2 L – Soundtrack 2 / Left channel
• 2 R – Soundtrack 2 / Right channel
59
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
CRhaepcteor 7rding
About DVD recording
About HDD recording
This recorder can record on both DVD-R and DVD-RW
media. The main difference between the two is that
DVD-R discs can only be recorded once, while DVD-RW
Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is
basically similar to recording to a VR mode DVD-RW disc.
You have the full choice of recording quality options,
including the manual mode, and of course you can
1
can be recorded, erased and re-recorded many times.
3
record, erase and re-record as many times as you like.
A further difference between the two disc types is that
only DVD-RW can be initialized for VR mode recording,
which offers much more comprehensive editing
functions compared to Video mode recording.
The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can
store many hours of video on it, even in the higher quality
4
recording modes. To help you organize the contents, the
HDD is divided into four groups. You can name and use
these groups as you like—for example, you might have a
group for movies, another for TV shows, and one for
camcorder recordings.
The big advantage, however, of Video mode is its
compatibility with standard DVD players, most of which
2
will not play VR mode DVD-RW discs.
While DVD-R discs can only be recorded using the Video
mode, you can initialize a DVD-RW disc for Video or VR
mode recordings. Once initialized (any previous content
is erased in this operation), all recordings on that disc
will be in the chosen recording mode.
Important
• It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on
the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure
that the Input Line System setting (page 108)
matches the TV line system of the source you’re
recording.
Important
• You cannot play, edit or record on unfinalized DVD-R/
RW discs recorded in Video mode on other DVD
recorders. (Likewise, unfinalized Video mode discs
recorded on this recorder are not playable on other
players/recorders.)
Recording time and picture quality
5
There are five preset recording quality modes :
• This recorder cannot record onto CD-R or CD-RW
discs.
• FINE – Highest quality setting, gives about one hour
of recording time on a DVD disc.
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure
due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the
recorder.
• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, sufficient for
most applications, gives about two hours of
recording time on a DVD.
• Fingerprints and small scratches on a disc can affect
playback and/or recording performance. Please take
proper care of your discs.
• LP (Long Play) – Slightly lower video quality, but
doubles the recording time on a DVD to around four
hours.
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also
Input Line System on page 108.
• EP (Extended Play) – EP gives you around six hours of
recording time on a DVD disc.
Note
1 The maximum number of titles that can be recorded on a DVD-R/RW disc is 99. The maximum number of chapters recordable on a DVD-R/
RW disc is 999. No more recording is possible on a disc that already contains the maximum number of chapters/titles.
2 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode DVD-RW discs. Check the operating instructions for your
player for VR mode compatibility information.
3 The maximum number of titles that can be recorded on the HDD is 999. The maximum number of chapters per title recordable on the HDD
is 99. No more recording is possible on the HDD after the maximum number of titles has been reached.
4 You can record up to 433 hours of video (in SLP mode) on the internal 250GB (gigabyte) hard disk (HDD). The maximum continuous recording
time is eight hours.
5 Note that all recording times (both here and those shown by the recorder) are only approximate. This is because of the way that the video is
recorded; you may get slightly more or slightly less, depending on what you’re recording.
60
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
• SLP (Super-Long Play) – Use when maximum
recording time is most important; SLP gives you
around eight hours of recording time on a DVD disc.
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that
you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you
cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD-
RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode or on
the HDD.
In addition to these settings, you can access 32 different
recording quality/time settings when manual recording
mode is on (see Manual Recording on page 117), giving
you precise control over the recording.
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that
are specifically compatible with CPRM.
When setting a timer recording there is a further option,
AUTO, which maximizes the recording quality for the
space available on the disc loaded at the time of
recording. (If recording to the HDD, the recording quality
is maximized to fit on to a DVD disc.)
Recording equipment and copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
The maximum continous recording time is eight hours
(one title) for both DVD and HDD recording. For a non-
timer recording, recording will automatically stop after
eight hours.
In all except the FINE/MN32 modes, sound is recorded in
two channel Dolby Digital format. When set to FINE/
MN32, sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed
Linear PCM format.
• This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of
certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording
in Video mode or to the HDD, or in VR mode on the FINE/
MN32 setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting
(page 114) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel to
record before recording starts.
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also
Input Line System on page 108.
Setting the picture quality/recording
time
VR mode Video mode
HDD
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set
the picture quality/recording time. There are five
standard settings available, which allow you to choose a
balance between picture quality and recording time.
Restrictions on video recording
• You cannot record copy-protected video using this
recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video
discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-
protected material is encountered during a
It’s also possible to create a sixth, ‘manual’ setting for
picture quality/recording time. Before you can select this,
however, you will need to set the Manual Recording
option in the Initial Settings menu (see Manual Recording
on page 117).
recording, recording will pause automatically and an
error message will be displayed on-screen.
• Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded on
the HDD or a DVD-RW disc in VR mode (see below).
• When recording a TV broadcast or through an
external input, you can display copy control
information on screen. (see Displaying disc
information on-screen on page 37).
REC MODE
CPRM
CPRM is a copy protection system with scramble system
regarding the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast
programs. CPRM stands for Content Protection for
Recordable Media.
61
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
•
Press REC MODE repeatedly to select a recording
1
Press HDD or DVD to record to the hard disk drive
setting.
or a recordable DVD respectively.
• FINE – Fine picture quality
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if
you load a new blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder
takes a short while to initialize the disc).
• SP – Standard play
• LP – Long play
2
Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to select the TV
• EP – Extended play
• SLP – Super-Long play
channel to record.
The front panel display shows the channel preset number
or name:
• MN – Manual (available only when manual recording
is on)
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting
(see On Screen Display on page 108) is Off then this
information is not displayed.)
2 3 3 0
PR
7
Preset number or name
• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the
number buttons on the remote to select the channel.
(For channel 6, press 6 then ENTER; for channel 24,
press 2, 4 then ENTER)
• If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the +/–
buttons on the front panel to select the channel
number.
Basic recording from the TV
3
Use the REC MODE button to set the picture
VR mode Video mode
HDD
quality/recording time.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on
Follow the instructions below to record a TV program.
Recording starts immediately and continues until the
disc is full or you stop the recording.
page 61 for detailed instructions.
4
Use the AUDIO button to select the audio
channel to record.
See Changing audio channels on page 33 for more on
this.
• When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is
bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing
you to switch the audio channel on playback. The
only exception to this is when the picture quality is set
to FINE/MN32, in which case you do need to select
the audio channel before recording.
HDD
DVD
AUDIO
5
Press ì REC to start recording.
CHANNEL
If you want to set a recording end time, press the ì REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The
time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the
front panel display. When the recording ends, the
recorder automatically switches into standby if no other
operation is being performed.
ENTER
• The top half of the front-panel ì REC button is backlit
red when recording.
PAUSE
• To cancel the set recording time, press ì REC.
REC
STOP REC REC MODE
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press
ꢊ PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording. (If
recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter
is started after recording restarts)
ì
6
To stop the recording, press ꢀ STOP REC.
• If you set the recording time in the previous step, you
can still stop the recording anytime by pressing ꢀ
STOP REC.
62
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after eight hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
4
To stop the recording, press ꢀ STOP REC.
• If you set the recording time in step 3, you can still
stop the recording anytime by pressing ꢀ STOP REC.
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after eight hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
Tip
• During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop
through function. During recording, press the front
panel + button to switch to SCART THRU (loop
through on), or – to switch to SCART NORM (loop
though off). Note that you can’t switch loop through
on if recording from the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER)
or AV1(RGB)-TV connectors. Also, loop through is
automatically reset to off after recording has
finished.
Tip
• You can press TV DIRECT REC while the recorder is
in standby to switch on and immediately start
recording.
• Please note that you can’t record from another
component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART
cable to the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector
using the TV Direct Recording feature.
Direct recording from TV
If you connected this recorder to your TV using a SCART
cable, and your TV supports Direct Recording, you can
record whatever is currently being shown on the TV
without having to worry about what channel preset the
recorder is on. Check the instructions that came with
your TV if you’re not sure whether your TV supports this
feature.
Setting a timer recording
VR mode Video mode
HDD
Using the timer recording features you can program up
to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer
recording programs can be set to record just once, every
day, or every week.
PAUSE
There are two ways to program a timer recording; using
the GUIDE Plus+ system (see The Schedule Area on
page 45) or using the Easy Timer Recording feature (see
Easy Timer Recording below).
REC
STOP REC REC MODE
ì
You can set the recording quality for your timer recording
in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the
added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the
recording quality for the space available on the disc (if
recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if
recording to HDD).
TV DIRECT
REC
1
2
If necessary, load a recordable disc.
You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable
DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly)
HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to
automatically replace the previous timer recording with
the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the
previous recording made on that timer program will be
replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have
watched it yet or not.
Set the picture quality/recording time using the
REC MODE button.
3
Press TV DIRECT REC to start recording.
If you want to set a recording time, press the ì REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. You
can see the recording time on-screen and in the front
panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder
automatically switches into standby if no other operation
is being performed.
You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc
if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set
(see Optimized Rec on page 117 for more on this).
• To cancel the set recording time, press ì REC.
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press
ꢊ PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording. (If
recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter
is started after recording restarts)
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the
recording, the Recovery Recording feature will
automatically record the program to the HDD for you.
63
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video
Easy Timer Recording
Programming System) and PDC (Program Delivery
Control) systems used by many TV stations to ensure that
a timer recording catches the whole program even when
the program is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer
programs can be set with VPS/PDC on.
As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes
1
setting up a timer recording as simple as possible.
Important
HDD
DVD
• A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32
timer programs waiting to be recorded.
• Timer recording will not start if:
– The recorder is already recording.
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.
CHANNEL
• Timer recording will start when the operation
preventing timer recording has finished.
• If a recordable DVD that doesn’t support
simultaneous playback and recording (see
Simultaneous recording and playback on page 66) is
playing when a DVD timer recording is due to start,
playback will automatically stop to allow the
recording to start.
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
• The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel
display when the timer is active. If the indicator is
blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording)
there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not
recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that
the HDD is not recordable).
REC MODE
ì
ꢏ
• Approximately two minutes before a timer recording
is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording
standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use
some functions.
• The maximum length for timer recordings made to
the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title is
limited to eight hours, recordings over eight hours
will be spread over two or more titles. Note that there
will be a break in the recording of a few seconds
between titles.
DVD RECORDER
1
Press HOME MENU and select Easy Timer.
• VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in
your country/area. Check with the stations for
compatibility.
GUIDE Plus+
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
Easy Timer
Disc History
• The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the morning are
used by GUIDE Plus+ to download program
information. During these times, VPS/PDC may not
work reliably; leave VPS/PDC off if you set a timer
recording for these times.
PhotoViewer
Note
1 You can’t use VPS/PDC with Easy Timer Recording. Set a scheduled recording using GUIDE Plus+ if you want to use VPS/PDC.
64
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
2
Set the TV channel and recording quality.
5
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) to move the
cursor to the recording end time on the grid.
Easy Timer Recording
Recording start time
Recording end time
8:00
9:00
10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00
13/12
14/12
15/12
Easy Timer Recording
11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00
13/12
14/12
15/12
MON
13/12
9:30 --:--
+
–
CHANNEL
REC MODE
HDD/DVD
/
Pr 7
FINE
HDD
MON
–
13/12 11:45
13:45
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to set the channel you
want to record.
+
CHANNEL
/
Pr 7
REC MODE FINE
HDD/DVD
HDD
• Use the REC MODE button to set the recording
quality. Press repeatedly to switch between FINE, SP,
LP, EP, SLP and AUTO (and MN if manual recording
mode is on).
As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow
stretches from the start time to the current cursor
position, representing the length of the recording. A
recording of up to six hours can be set.
• DVD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets
the best recording quality for the space available on
the disc loaded at the time of recording.
6
Press ENTER to set the end time.
7
Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer recording and exit, or
• HDD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets
the best recording quality that would fit on to a blank
DVD disc.
‘No’ to go back to the timer recording screen.
• You can check the timer recording details you just set
from the Schedule Area in GUIDE Plus+; see The
Schedule Area on page 45).
• Press DVD to record to DVD disc, or HDD if you want
to record to the hard disk drive.
Extending a timer recording in progress
You can extend a timer recording beyond the
programmed end time in two different ways. This can be
useful if a broadcast program overruns, for example.
3
Use ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to move the
cursor to the recording start date and time on the
grid.
• You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at
a time using the ꢈ and ꢉ buttons.
CLEAR
Current time
Recording start time
ENTER
Easy Timer Recording
HOME
MENU
8:00
9:00
10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00
13/12
14/12
15/12
MON
13/12 11:45 --:--
PREV
REC
NEXT
+
–
CHANNEL
Pr 7
FINE
HDD
/
REC MODE
HDD/DVD
STOP REC
TIMER REC
ì
Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer
recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is
a 15 minute interval.
The darker area represents time that has already passed
and can’t therefore be selected. The lighter area is time
that’s available.
Moving the end time by 30-minute blocks
During timer recording, press and hold ì REC for
three seconds.
The timer indicator disappears from the front panel
1
4
Press ENTER to set the start time.
The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the
display.
screen.
2
Press ì REC repeatedly to extend recording in 30
• You can go back and reset the start time if you need
to by pressing RETURN.
minute increments.
65
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
Canceling and stopping a timer recording in
progress
Timer recording FAQ
After a timer recording has started, you can cancel the
program (but continue recording), or stop recording
completely if you need to.
Frequently Asked Questions
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start
recording!
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not
locked (see Lock Disc on page 102), and that there are
fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.
REC
STOP REC
ì
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer program! Why
not?
1
During timer recording, press and hold ì REC for
You can’t enter a timer program if the clock isn’t set.
three seconds.
Only the program is canceled (the timer indicator
disappears); recording continues so that you can
manually stop recording whenever you like.
• What happens when two or more timer programs
overlap?
Basically, the program with the earlier recording start
time has priority. However, the recorder will start
recording the program with the later start time after
the earlier program is finished. If two programs have
the same times (but different channels, for example),
the program set most recently takes priority.
2
When you want to stop recording completely,
press ꢀ STOP REC.
Preventing use of the recorder before a
timer recording (child lock)
You can make all the front panel and remote control
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make
sure that the timer settings are not changed before
recording has finished.
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are
programmed to start at the same time, then the
program that actually starts first takes priority.
1
If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.
Simultaneous recording and
playback
2
Press and hold ꢄ STOP on the front panel for
three seconds to lock the controls.
The front panel display briefly shows LOCK. If any buttons
are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly
displayed again.
VR mode
HDD
A feature called Chase Play makes it possible to watch a
recording in progress (DVD or HDD) from the start of the
recording (as in, playback is ‘chasing’ the recording).
For example, perhaps you have to miss the first 30
minutes of a movie on TV; you can start recording, then
start watching the movie, from the beginning, while the
recorder is still recording 30 minutes ahead of you.
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold ꢄ STOP on
the front panel for three seconds until the display
shows UNLOCK.
1
• To cancel a timer recording when the recorder is
locked, first unlock the recorder (see above), then
press and hold ì REC for three seconds.
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording
in progress; you can watch anything else already on the
DVD or HDD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator
screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD on page 52).
Note
1 • You can’t use simultaneous playback and recording while copying or backing up.
• During recording or in timer recording standby, you can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the Input Line System setting
doesn’t match the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also Input Line System on page 108). Also, during simultaneous recording and
playback, if the TV line system of the playback track/title changes then playback will automatically stop.
66
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
1
Make sure that the component you want to
Important
record from is connected properly to the DVD
recorder.
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for connection options.
• Note that you must use a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or
Ver. 1.2 / 4x disc to be able to use this feature.
• You may not be able to use this feature with a
DVD-RW disc that was first initialized on another
recorder.
2
Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select one of
the external inputs to record from.
There are three analog inputs and a DV digital input. The
current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel
display:
•
During recording, press ꢅ PLAY to start playback
from the beginning of the current recording, or press
DISC NAVIGATOR and select another title to play
from there.
• L1 – Input 1
• L2 – Input 2 (front panel)
• L3 – Input 3
You can use all the usual playback controls, such as
1
pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.
• DV – DV input/output (front panel)
• To stop playback, press ꢄ STOP (recording will
continue).
Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio,
Bilingual Recording and DV Input are as you want them
(see Audio In settings on page 113).
• To stop recording, press ꢀ STOP REC (playback will
continue).
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or
stretched), adjust on the source component or your
TV before recording.
Recording from an external
component
3
Set up the recorder.
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 61
for detailed information.
VR mode Video mode
HDD
You can record from an external component, such as a
camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s
external inputs.
• Press HDD to record to the hard disk drive, or DVD to
record to a DVD.
2
4
Press ì REC when you’re ready to start
recording.
ꢆ
• The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN/
OUT jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will also
pause if the signal is interrupted during recording.
HDD
DVD
INPUT
SELECT
CLEAR
ENTER
ꢍ
REC MODE
ꢎ
REC
ì
ꢏ
Note
1 • You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts.
• When scanning a DVD, no sound is output if the recorder is also recording the DVD (see Scanning discs on page 53).
2 If your source is copy-protected using CopyGuard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 61 for more
details.
67
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically
when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is
more than 10 seconds of blank tape, the recorder will
stop recording and the camcorder should stop
(depending on the camcorder).
Recording from a DV camcorder
VR mode Video mode
HDD
You can record from a DV camcorder connected to the
DV IN/OUT jack on the front panel of this recorder. Using
the recorder’s remote, you can control both the
• For best results when recording from a DV
camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing
the camcorder to the place you want to start
recording from and setting the camcorder to play-
pause.
1
camcorder and this recorder.
Before recording, make sure that the audio input for the
DV IN/OUT jack is setup (see DV Input on page 114).
2
1
Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to
the front panel DV IN/OUT jack.
ꢆ
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
HDD
DVD
2
Set up the recorder.
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 61
for detailed information.
• Make sure a recordable disc is loaded if you want to
record to DVD.
CLEAR
3
From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you require.
See DV Input on page 114 for more on this.
ENTER
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want
them (see Audio In settings on page 113).
HOME
MENU
RETURN
REV SCAN
PAUSE
PLAY
FWD SCAN
4
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’ then ‘DV
STOP
Record’ from the menu.
STEP/SLOW
ꢍ
REC MODE
ꢎ
ì
ꢏ
GUIDE Plus+
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
Easy Timer
Disc History
PhotoViewer
Important
• The source signal must be DVC-SD format.
• DV recording only works when the digital camcorder
is in VTR mode with a tape loaded.
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this
recorder’s remote.
5
Select ‘Record to HDD’ or ‘Record to DVD’ to
• If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,
you cannot control the second unit from this one.
record to the hard disk drive or a recordable DVD
respectively.
• You can’t control this unit remotely from a
component connected to the DV IN/OUT jack.
6
Find the place on the camcorder tape that you
want to start recording from.
For best results, pause playback at the point from which
you want to record.
• You can’t record date and time information from DV
cassette.
Note
1 Depending on the connected camcorder, you may not be able to control it using the remote control supplied with this recorder.
2 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually
from the External Audio setting (page 114).
68
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the
ꢄ , ꢅ , ꢊ , ꢈ , ꢉ , ꢍ and ꢎ buttons.
Recording from the DV output
VR mode Video mode
HDD
7
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
You can record non-copy-protected material from the
hard disk drive or from a DVD to a camcorder connected
to the DV IN/OUT jack.
‘Start Rec’ and press ENTER.
ꢄ Stop
1.02.22
ꢄ Stop
1
Connect the camcorder to the DV IN/OUT jack of
this recorder.
Control with these
buttons
Start Rec
Pause Rec
Stop Rec
2
3
4
5
Select the HDD or DVD for playback.
HDD SP (2h00m/DVD)
Remain
1h40m
Find the place you want to start recording from.
Start recording on the camcorder.
Play the source material.
• Recording is automatically paused if the recorder
detects no signal, or a copy-protected signal.
Recording restarts when there is a non-copy-
protected signal.
• You can pause or stop the recording by selecting
Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display.
You cannot control the camcorder from this remote
control during recording.
Playing your recordings on other DVD
players
VR mode Video mode
• If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,
the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not
be recorded. Use the pause button on your
camcorder instead and recording will start
immediately.
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs
recorded in Video mode. A number of players (including
many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs
recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Check the manual
that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it
will play.
• HDD and DVD-RW (VR Mode) only: A chapter marker
is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode
on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is
stopped or paused then restarted, for example.
When you finalize a Video mode disc, a title menu is
created from which you can select titles when you play
the disc. There are a number of different styles of title
menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc.
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording
screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button.
All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,
pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then
using the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) followed by
ENTER to select titles and start playback.
• See also DV-related messages on page 129 if you
encounter an error while using the DV IN/OUT jack.
Frequently Asked Questions
Finalizing a disc
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!
VR mode Video mode
Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also
make sure that what you’re trying to record is not
copy-protected.
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder
then switch back on.
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc
Name on page 102 before starting the steps below.
• There’s a picture, but no sound!
Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on
page 114) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
69
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
07
• If the finalization process is going to take more than
around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel.
Around four minutes before completion, the option to
cancel disappears.
Important
• Once you’ve finalized a disc recorded in Video mode,
you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc.
However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe
‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 103 for how to do
this.
• How long finalization takes depends on the type of
disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR
mode can take up to one hour to finalize. A disc
recorded in Video mode can take up to 20 minutes.
• A VR mode disc can still be recorded and edited on
this recorder even after finalizing.
1
Load the disc you want to finalize.
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before
proceeding.
1
Initializing a DVD-RW disc
DVD-RW
2
3
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
Select ‘Finalize’.
When you first load a blank disc, the recorder will
initialize it automatically for recording. You can also
manually initialize DVD-RW discs.
Disc Setup
You can initialize a disc for either Video mode recording
or VR mode recording.
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Finalize
Undo Finalize
Next Screen
Start
2
Optimize HDD
Important
• Initializing a disc will erase everything recorded on it.
Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want
to keep!
4
Select ‘Finalize’ from the finalize options, then
‘Next Screen’.
• You may not be able to re-initialize a disc in a different
format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD
recorder.
5
For Video mode discs only, select a title menu
style, then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to
cancel.
The menu you select will be the one that appears when
the ‘top menu’ is selected on any DVD player.
1
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
Select ‘Initialize’.
Finalize
Disc Setup
TITLE MENU
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
VR Mode
Video Mode
Start
Start
Optimize HDD
3
Select ‘Video Mode’ or ‘VR Mode’ from the
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer
DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature.
These discs will have only a text title menu when
finalized on this recorder.
initialize options.
4
Select ‘Start’.
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc.
6
The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.
Initializing disc
Pr 1
1 min left
During finalization:
Note
1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Input Line System
on page 108 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
2 • By default, the recorder initializes blank DVD-RW discs for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on page 118 if you want to change the
default to Video mode.
• If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording.
70
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
CChaoptpery8 ing and back-up
getting worse with each copy ‘generation’. It also means
that copying can be carried out at the maximum speed
possible.
Introduction
Use the copying features of this recorder to:
When copying from HDD to DVD, the speed of copying
depends on the recording mode and the kind of DVD disc
you’re using. The table at the bottom of the page shows
the minimum copying time for one hour of material.
• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to
a DVD
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play
in another player.
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.
Important
• Not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying.
Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility.
The simplest method of copying is to use the One Touch
Copy feature. Using this you can simply copy the title
that’s currently playing from HDD to DVD, or the other
way around.
• There may be cases where even 2x/4x/8x compatible
discs do not copy at full speed.
• High-speed copying is not possible when using discs
initialized on another recorder.
For more complicated copying tasks you can make a
Copy List which specifies precisely what needs to be
copied. A Copy List is similar to a VR mode Play List in
many ways, and you’ll find that the Copy List commands
are similar to those available for editing a Play List.
• The table below shows disc brands that have been
tested for 8x speed writing compatibility with this
recorder.
A message showing that copying has finished is
displayed after copying. If the recorder is inactive and no
button is pressed (remote or front panel) then the
recorder will automatically go into standby after 20
minutes.
Maker
Sony
That’s
JVC
Fujifilm
TDK
Maxell
Verbatim
Ritek
High-speed copying
Copying between DVD and HDD is a completely digital
process and therefore involves no loss of quality in the
audio or video. This means that you can transfer back
and forth without having to worry about the quality
(As of July, 2004)
DVD disc type
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4x*3
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/8x*4
DVD-R Ver. 2.0
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1/2x*2 DVD-RW Ver. 1.2/4x*3
Rec mode
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1*1
SLP
EP
7.5 mins.
4 mins.
5 mins.
2 mins.
2.5 mins.
4 mins.
1.1 mins.
1.25 mins.
2 mins.
10 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
60 mins.
LP
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
SP
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
4 mins.
FINE
8 mins.
Note that all times in the above table are approximate.
*1 Compatible with single speed recording only
*2 Compatible with 2x speed recording
*3 Compatible with 4x speed recording
*4 Compatible with 8x speed recording. Note that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded.
71
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
Real-time copying
Copyright
Real-time copying is also possible, with the advantage
that you can manually set a different recording mode
from the original. For example, you can record a title
originally recorded in FINE mode in SP mode.
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode
DVD, the chapter markers in the original material are not
copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at
intervals, according to the Auto Chapter (Video) setting
(see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 118).
One Touch Copy1 (HDD to DVD)
The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing
title (or currently selected title in the Disc Navigator) from
the HDD to DVD. The whole title is copied, regardless of
where in the title you start copying. The recorder copies
Frame accuracy and copying
The Frame Accurate setting (see Frame Accurate on
page 118) does not affect the actual video content on the
HDD, but it does affect what can be copied and whether
high-speed copying can be used.
2
at the maximum speed possible.
For One Touch Copy to work, make sure that a recordable
DVD-R/RW disc is loaded.
When Frame Accurate is set to Off, high-speed copying
can generally be used to copy titles in the Copy List using
a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc in VR or Video mode. However,
copy-once protected material (see Restrictions on
copying below) can’t be added to the Copy List, and the
divide points in edited titles may be out by as much as 0.5
seconds when compared to the original.
ONE TOUCH
COPY
ꢆ
HDD
DVD
When Frame Accurate is On, you can add copy-once
protected titles to the Copy List and divide points in
edited titles are maintained accurately. However,
depending on the content of the Copy List and the disc, it
may not be possible to use high-speed copying.
•
During HDD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to
copy the current title to DVD.
The front panel display indicates that the title is being
copied. Playback continues while copying.
Restrictions on copying
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to use a VR mode
DVD-RW disc compatible with CPRM Ver. 1.1 or higher
(see CPRM on page 61 for more on this). Only one
instance of a copy-once protected title can be added to
the Copy List, and after it’s been copied, the title is erased
from the HDD (it is therefore not possible to copy a
locked title that is copy-once protected).
You can identify copy-once protected material during
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark
( ! ) is shown (see Play display 2 on page 39).
Note
1 See also Copyright above.
2 • Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail picture markers (Navimark) for the Disc Navigator, are also copied. However, if you copy
to a Video mode DVD-R/RW, only the first 32 characters of a name are copied.
• The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same positions as the original when recording on to a Video mode disc.
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-RW disc for this type of material.
• Low resolution (SLP, EP or LP, or MN1–18) widescreen material can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-RW disc for this
type of material.
72
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
•
During DVD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to
copy the current title to HDD.
One Touch Copy1 (DVD to HDD)
Playback starts again from the beginning of the current
title. The front panel display and an on-screen display
indicate that the title is being copied.
One Touch Copy from DVD to HDD copies a single title to
2
the HDD in real time. You can copy the currently playing
title or the currently selected title in the Disc Navigator.
When you start copying, playback jumps back to the start
of the title, then continues through to the end of the title,
when recording automatically stops. The copy will be
made in the recording mode (FINE, SP, etc.) that is
currently set.
Canceling One Touch Copy
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.
However, the space available for recording does not
return to the pre-copy figure.
•
Press and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more than
a second.
Copying is canceled and the video already copied is
erased.
ONE TOUCH
COPY
ꢆ
HDD
DVD
Copying from HDD to DVD3
Currently selected HDD title
Title that cannot be
added to Copy List
HDD to DVD Copy
HDD Groups
All
1
HDD
2
3
4
Titles in the selected
HDD Group
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
16:00 Sun 8/11
Recording Time
Pr 5 LP
0h32m55s
Information for the
selected title
Copy List
menu options
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
1
2
3
4
Copy List titles
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Running time of the
Copy List
Conf List
From the HDD to DVD Copy screen you can build up a
Copy List of titles to copy to DVD. From this screen you
can also edit chapters so that the titles appear as you
want them on your finished DVD.
Note
1 See also Copyright on page 72.
2 • The maximum title length for copying is six hours.
• Title name and chapter markers are also copied, except when copying from a finalized Video mode disc.
• Thumbnail picture markers (Navimark) and chapter markers for the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in the copy may be slightly
changed from the original.
• If some part of the title being copied is copy-protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will not be copied.
3 See also Copyright on page 72.
73
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight
the command you want from the menu options on
the left, then press ENTER. Most commands require
you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from
the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the ꢂ/
ꢃ (cursor left/right) followed by ENTER to do this.
• When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the
PREV (ꢋ) and NEXT (ꢌ) buttons to display the
previous/next page if there are more titles/chapters
than will fit on the screen.
Important
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
• The Copy List is erased if the Frame Accurate setting
is changed in the Initial Settings menu (see Frame
Accurate on page 118), or if the Input Line System
setting is changed (see Input Line System on
page 108).
• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 123) will also erase the
Copy List.
• As you highlight different thumbnails, information
about the title/chapter is shown in the central area of
the screen. Press DISPLAY to change the
information displayed.
• Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
the left from the thumbnail area of the Copy List
screen.
ENTER
HOME
MENU
• When selecting HDD titles, you can display titles
from a particular HDD group by pressing ꢀ (cursor
up), then using the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons
and ENTER to select a group. Press ꢁ (cursor down)
to get back to the HDD title thumbnail area.
PREV
NEXT
DVD Copy
All
DISPLAY
HDD to DVD Copy List menu options
1
Make sure that there’s a recordable DVD disc
Use the following commands when making an HDD to
DVD Copy List:
loaded.
• Add – Add titles from the HDD to the Copy List (see
page 75).
2 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
page 76).
GUIDE Plus+
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title in
the Copy List (see page 76).
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see
page 76).
Easy Timer
Disc History
PhotoViewer
• Combine – Combine two adjacent titles in the Copy
List into one (see page 77).
3
Select ‘HDD ꢅ DVD’.
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List
(see page 77).
The HDD to DVD Copy List screen appears.
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see page 77).
HDD to DVD Copy
All
HDD
• Erase All – Erase the Copy List (see page 78).
1
2
3
4
HDD
HDD
• Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Edit chapters within a
Copy List title (see page 78):
• Erase – Erase a chapter.
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two.
• Combine – Combine two chapters into one.
• Move – Change the chapter order.
• Preview – Check the chapter content.
1/3
1/1
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
Copy List
Total 0h00m
Conf List
74
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
• Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase a section of a title
in the Copy List (see page 80).
When you change the recording mode setting, you can
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording
quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.
• Confirm List (Conf List) – Confirm the Copy List and
go to the recording settings screen (see Recording
the Copy List below).
3
Select ‘Start’ to begin copying.
Recording the Copy List
After putting together your Copy List, you’re ready to
record it.
HDD to DVD Copy List commands
1
Select ‘Conf List’ to display the Copy List settings
screen.
Add
2
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
Use this command to add titles to the Copy List.
the Recording Mode.
1
Select ‘Add’ from the Copy List menu options.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
HDD to DVD Copy
a title from the HDD to add to the Copy List, then
press ENTER.
HDD
HDD
DVD-RW VIDEO
Required 0h08m
High Speed
Recording Mode
HDD to DVD Copy
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
Start
All
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1175MB
2830MB
/ 4700MB
HDD
1
2
3
4
4
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
16:00 Sun 11/8 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
Conf List
0h32m55s
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
1
2
3
• High-Speed Copy – The Copy List is copied at the
same recording quality as the original. (See page 71
Copy List
Total 1h30m
1
Conf List
for more information on high-speed copying.)
• FINE, SP, LP, EP, SLP, MN – The Copy List is copied at
the specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that
if you copy at a higher quality setting than the
original, the copy will not be better quality than the
original.)
The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the
lower half of the screen. If there are already titles in the
Copy List, the title is added at the end.
3
Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List,
or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu
options.
If you select MN above, you can also change the level
setting (MN1–MN32) from the Recording Quality box
that appears.
• Optimized – The recording quality automatically
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space
available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-
time.
Note
1 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD, the chapter markers of the original
are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video)
on page 118).
2 Only titles which were recorded in the same TV system as the recorder is currently set to can be added to the Copy List.
When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 118), the following limitations on adding titles to the Copy List apply:
• When adding titles that contain copy-once protected material, the copy-once parts will not be added to the Copy List.
• When adding titles that contain material of more than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a different aspect ratio will be added as
a separate title.
• Widescreen material recorded in LP, EP, SLP or MN1–18 will not be added to the Copy List.
• Chapter markers on the copy may be up to 0.5 seconds off compared to the original.
75
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
3
Input a name for the selected title.
Erase
Use this command to erase individual titles from the
Copy List.
Input Title Name
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
1
Select ‘Erase’ from the Copy List menu options.
A B C D E F G H I
J
K L M .
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS
small
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z
(
I
ç
A A
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $
_
&
a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER.
~
}
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
±
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
¨
© –
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
µ
¶
–
/2
/4
´
HDD to DVD Copy
OK
Delete
Space
All
HDD
1
1
2
3
4
4
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) and ENTER to
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
0h32m55s
select characters.
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
2
3
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the ꢈ/ꢉ buttons to change the cursor
position.
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Conf List
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢋ/
ꢌ).
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm that you want to erase the
title, or ‘No’ to cancel.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to erase more titles from
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name). For other remote control
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name on page 90.
the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the
Copy List menu options.
Title Name (Ttl Name)
Use this command to name or rename titles in the Copy
List (the names of the original titles remain unchanged).
• Press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen
without changing the name.
4
To confirm the name and return to the main
1
Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Copy List menu
Copy List screen, highlight ‘OK’ and press ENTER.
options.
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to name other titles in the
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy
List menu options.
a title from the Copy List to name or rename, then
press ENTER.
HDD to DVD Copy
Divide
All
Use this command to make two titles from a title already
HDD
1
2
3
4
4
1
in the Copy List.
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
15:00 Tue 6/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
0h32m55s
1
Select ‘Divide’ from the Copy List menu options.
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
1
2
3
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to divide, then press ENTER.
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Conf List
HDD to DVD Copy
All
HDD
1
1
2
3
4
4
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
0h32m55s
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
2
3
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Conf List
Note
1 When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 118), the divide points may move by up to half a second after selecting Divide.
76
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
3
Use the playback controls to find the place you
3
Repeat step 2 to combine more titles, or press
want to divide the title.
RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options.
Divide Title
Preview
HDD
Use this command to check the content of a title in the
Copy List.
16:00 Sun 11/08 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Title
2
2-1
0.08.13.26
ꢊ Play Pause
1
Select ‘Preview’ from the Copy List menu
Divide
Back
options.
Divide
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to preview, then press
ENTER.
The selected title starts playing. You can return to the
Copy List screen by pressing ꢄ STOP, otherwise
playback will continue until the end of the Copy List.
You can use all the usual playback controls, including
ꢅ PLAY, ꢊ PAUSE, scan (ꢈ, ꢉ), and slow-motion
(ꢍ, ꢎ).
• During preview, you can select a new thumbnail for
• Press RETURN or highlight Back and press ENTER to
go back to the main Copy List screen, leaving the title
intact.
the Disc Navigator by pressing NAVI MARK.
3
Repeat step 2 to preview other titles, or press
RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options.
4
With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide
the title at the current playback position.
Move
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to divide other titles in the
Use this command to change the order of titles in the
Copy List.
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy
List menu options.
1
Select ‘Move’ from the Copy List menu options.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
Combine
a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER.
Use this command to make a single title from two
1
adjacent titles in the Copy List.
HDD to DVD Copy
All
1
Select ‘Combine’ from the Copy List menu
HDD
1
1
2
3
4
4
options.
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
0h32m55s
two adjacent titles from the Copy List to combine,
then press ENTER.
Preview
Move
Erase All
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
DVD
DVD
2
3
Copy List
Total 1h30m
HDD to DVD Copy
Conf List
All
HDD
1
2
2
3
4
4
The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the
lower half of the screen.
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
Add
Erase
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine
DVD
DVD
1
3
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Conf List
Note
1 When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 118), the following limitations apply when combining titles:
• Mixed aspect ratios (16:9, 4:3, 4:3 (letter box)) can’t be combined.
• Mixed recording modes (SLP/MN1–2, EP/MN3–6, LP/MN7–18, SP/MN19–31, FINE/MN32) can’t be combined.
77
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
3
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
1
Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Copy List menu
a new position for the title, then press ENTER.
options.
The thumbnails in the Copy List reflect the new order.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to edit, then press ENTER.
HDD to DVD Copy
All
HDD
HDD to DVD Copy
1
1
2
3
4
4
All
HDD
HDD
HDD
1
1
2
3
4
4
1/3
1/2
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
0h32m55s
HDD
HDD
Preview
Move
Erase All
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
1/3
1/2
DVD
DVD
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
2
3
0h32m55s
Preview
Move
DVD
DVD
2
3
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Erase All
Chpt Edit
Erase sec
Conf List
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Conf List
Title to move
Copy List insertion point
The chapter editing screen appears with thumbnails of
each chapter.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy
List menu options.
3
Select a command from the chapter edit menu
options.
Chapter Edit
Erase All
Use this command to erase the Copy List.
HDD
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Title
Chapter
---h--m
2
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
1
Select ‘Erase All’ from the Copy List menu
options.
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
Preview
Back
1/1
HDD to DVD Copy
All
1
HDD
Chapter edit menu
The following commands are available:
2
2
3
4
4
HDD
HDD
1/3
1/2
Preview
Move
Erase All
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
• Erase – Erase individual chapters: Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/
ꢃ (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select a chapter to
erase. The chapter is erased after confirming.
DVD
DVD
1
3
Copy List
Erase all titles ?
Total 1h30m
Conf List
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more new
Yes
No
chapters: See Chapter Edit: Divide below.
• Combine – Combine two chapters into one: See
Chapter Edit: Combine below.
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit)
• Move – Change the order of the chapters: See
Chapter Edit: Move below.
The Chapter Edit option gives you access to several
commands that you can use to edit chapters within a
Copy List title.
• Preview – Check the content of a chapter: Use the
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ(cursor buttons) to select a chapter, then
press ENTER. Once the preview has started, press ꢄ
STOP to return to the chapter edit screen.
Editing chapters in a Copy List title does not change any
actual content on the HDD. It affects only how the
chapters appear after copying.
4
Press RETURN to get back to the chapter editing
options on the left, or select another chapter.
5
Select ‘Back’ (or press RETURN) to go back to the
main Copy List screen.
78
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
Chapter Edit: Divide
Chapter Edit: Move
You can divide a chapter into as many new chapters as
necessary.
This command lets you rearrange the chapters within a
Copy List title.
1
1
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select the
1
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select the
chapter you want to move, then press ENTER.
chapter to divide, then press ENTER.
2
Use the playback controls to find the place you
Chapter Edit
want to divide the chapter.
HDD
Title
2
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Chapter
0h05m
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Divide Chapter
HDD
Title 12:18 Wed 7/10
Recording Time
SP
Chapter
0h00m
Erase
1
0h01m24s
Divide
Combine
Move
1-3
ꢊ Play Pause
0.00.52.17
Preview
Divide
Back
Back
1/1
Divide
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select a
new position for the chapter, then press ENTER.
You can use all the usual playback controls, including
ꢅ PLAY, ꢊ PAUSE, scan (ꢈ, ꢉ), and slow-motion
(ꢍ, ꢎ).
Title to move
Chapter Edit
3
With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide
HDD
Title
2
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Chapter
---h--m
the chapter at the current playback position.
You can divide the chapter as many times as you want
(up to 99 per title).
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
4
Select ‘Back’ (or press RETURN) to get back to the
main Chapter Edit screen.
Preview
Back
1/1
Chapter Edit: Combine
This command lets you combine two chapters into one.
Insertion point
The thumbnails in the chapter list reflect the new order.
1
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select the
space between the chapters to combine.
Chapter Edit
HDD
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Title
2
Chapter
---h--m
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
Preview
Back
1/1
2
Press ENTER to combine.
Note
1 When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 118), the divide point may move by up to half a second after selecting Divide.
79
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
Erase Section (Erase Sec)
press ENTER.
Using this command you can delete a part of a Copy List
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
1
recording made from the TV.
1
Select ‘Erase Sec’ from the Copy List menu
6
Repeat steps 3 to 5 if you want to erase more
options.
sections from the same title.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
7
Select ‘Back’ (or press RETURN) to get back to the
the title you want to erase a section from, then press
ENTER.
main Copy List screen.
After selecting a title, a screen appears from which you
can mark the start and end points of the section to erase.
Erase Sec
HDD
16:00 Sun 11/08 Pr 5 LP
Title
2
Recording Time
0h32m55s
2-1
ꢊ Play Pause
0.06.52.17
A
B
Erase Sec
Back
From
To
3
Use the playback controls to find the start of the
section to erase, then (with ‘From’ highlighted) press
ENTER.
You can use all the usual playback controls, including
ꢅ PLAY, ꢊ PAUSE, scan (ꢈ, ꢉ), and slow-motion
(ꢍ, ꢎ).
The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
appears under the bar to show the start of the section.
ꢊ Play Pause
A
B
From
0.02.09.17
T
A
4
In the same way, find the end of the section to
erase, then (with ‘To’ highlighted) press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker appears under the
bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself
marked in red.
Note
1 When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Accurate on page 118), the ‘From’ time and length of the erased section may differ by up to 0.5
seconds from that set.
80
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
Copying from DVD to HDD1
Currently selected DVD title
DVD to HDD Copy
Original
DVD
1
2
3
4
4
DVD
DVD
1/3
1/2
16:00 Sun 8/11 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
Information for the
selected title
0h32m55s
Copy List
menu options
Add
Erase
Move
HDD
HDD
1
2
3
Copy List titles
Preview
Erase All
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Running time of the
Copy List
Conf List
Use the DVD to HDD Copy screen to transfer video on
DVD to the hard disk.
Important
ENTER
HOME
MENU
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen is not accessible when
a finalized Video mode disc is loaded. However, you
can still use the One Touch Copy function (see One
Touch Copy (DVD to HDD) on page 73).
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
PREV
NEXT
• The copy list will be erased if:
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or
edited.
– the disc tray is opened.
DISPLAY
– playback is switched between Original and Play
List.
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.
– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 123).
1
Load the recordable DVD disc that contains the
material you want to copy to the HDD.
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.
• It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that
was recorded on a different DVD recorder or PC.
GUIDE Plus+
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
Easy Timer
Disc History
PhotoViewer
• Note that the Copy option will not be available if the
TV system of the recorder and the disc do not match.
(See Input Line System on page 108 for how to
change the TV system of the recorder.)
Note
1 See also Copyright on page 72.
81
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
3
Select ‘DVD ꢅ HDD’.
The DVD to HDD Copy screen appears.
Recording the Copy List
After putting together your Copy List, you’re ready to
record it.
DVD to HDD Copy
Original
DVD
1
2
3
4
1
Select ‘Conf List’ to display the Copy List settings
screen.
DVD
DVD
1/3
1/1
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
Add
Erase
Move
HDD
HDD
the Recording Mode.
Preview
Erase All
Copy List
Total 0h00m
DVD to HDD Copy
Original
DVD
Conf List
DVD
HDD
Required 1h30m
SP
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight
the command you want from the menu options on
the left, then press ENTER. Most commands require
you then to select a title or location from the
thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the ꢂ/ꢃ
(cursor left/right) followed by ENTER to do this.
Recording Mode
Start
Add
Erase
Move
Preview
Erase All
Copy List Total
Current HDD Remain
1h30m
30h00m
/ 34h00m
Conf List
• When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the
PREV (ꢋ) and NEXT (ꢌ) buttons to display the
previous/next page if there are more titles than will fit
on the screen.
• High-Speed Copy – Only available when copying
Original content from a VR mode disc. The Copy List
is copied at the same recording quality as the
original. (See page 71 for more information on high-
speed copying.)
• As you highlight different thumbnails, information
about the title is shown in the central area of the
screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information
displayed.
• FINE, SP, LP, EP, SLP, MN – The Copy List is copied at
the specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that
if you copy at a higher quality setting than the
original, the copy will not be better quality than the
original.)
• Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
the left from the thumbnail area of the Copy List
screen.
• If you select MN above, you can also change the level
setting (MN1–MN32) from the Recording Quality box
that appears.
DVD to HDD Copy List menu options
When you change the recording mode setting, you can
see how much hard disk space it will require. If this is
more than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t
be able to start copying. In this case, either change the
recording quality, or press RETURN to go back to the
Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the
Copy List.
Use the following commands when making a DVD to
HDD Copy List:
• Add – Select and add titles to the Copy List (see
page 83).
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see page 83).
• Erase All – Erase the Copy List (see page 84).
3
Select ‘Start’ to begin copying.
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List
(see page 84).
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
page 83).
• Confirm List (Conf List) – Confirm the Copy List and
go to the recording settings screen (see Recording
the Copy List below).
82
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm that you want to erase the
title, or ‘No’ to cancel.
DVD to HDD Copy List commands
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to erase more titles from
the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the
Copy List menu options.
Add
1
Use this command to add titles to the Copy List.
1
Select ‘Add’ from the Copy List menu options.
Move
Use this command to change the order of titles currently
in the Copy List.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the DVD to add to the Copy List, then
press ENTER.
1
Select ‘Move’ from the Copy List menu options.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
DVD to HDD Copy
Play List
DVD
a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER.
1
2
3
4
4
DVD to HDD Copy
Play List
DVD
DVD
DVD
1/3
1/2
16:00 Sun 8/11 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
0h32m55s
1
1
2
3
4
4
Add
Erase
Move
HDD
HDD
1
2
3
DVD
DVD
1/3
1/2
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
Preview
Erase All
0h32m55s
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Add
Erase
Move
Conf List
HDD
HDD
2
3
Preview
Erase All
Copy List
Total 1h30m
The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the
lower half of the screen. If there are already titles in the
Copy List, the title is added at the end.
Conf List
3
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
the insertion point for the title, then press ENTER.
3
Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List,
or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu
options.
DVD to HDD Copy
Play List
DVD
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
Erase
DVD
DVD
Use this command to erase individual titles from the
Copy List.
1/3
1/2
Add
Erase
Move
Preview
Erase All
HDD
HDD
3
1
Select ‘Erase’ from the Copy List menu options.
Copy List
Total 1h30m
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
Conf List
a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER.
Title to move
Copy List insertion point
DVD to HDD Copy
Play List
DVD
1
1
2
3
4
4
DVD
DVD
The thumbnails in the Copy List are updated to reflect the
new order.
1/3
1/2
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
0h32m55s
Add
Erase
Move
HDD
HDD
2
3
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy
List menu options.
Preview
Erase All
Copy List
Total 1h30m
Conf List
Note
1 • Titles which were recorded directly to a VR mode disc or have already been copied real-time, and which contain bilingual audio or are re-
corded in recording modes MN12–MN20 can be added to the Copy List, however if High-Speed Copy is selected they will not actually be
copied.
• Similarly, a copy-once protected title, recorded from the TV for example, can be added to the Copy List, but it will not be copied if High-Speed
Copy is selected.
• You may not be able to copy titles when copying a disc that was created using a PC or another recorder.
83
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
Preview
Use this command to check the content of a title in the
Copy List.
Using disc back-up1
This feature offers a simple way to make a back-up copy
of a finalized Video mode disc. The data is copied first to
the hard disk drive, then on to another recordable DVD
1
Select ‘Preview’ from the Copy List menu
options.
2
disc.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to preview, then press
ENTER.
The selected title starts playing. You can return to the
Copy List screen by pressing ꢄ STOP, otherwise
playback will continue until the end of the Copy List.
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select ‘Copy’
Select ‘Disc Back-up’.
Select a back-up option.
3
Repeat step 2 to preview other titles, or press
RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options.
Disc Back-up
Erase All
Start new disc back-up
Use this command to erase the Copy List.
Resume writing data
Erase back-up data
1
Select ‘Erase All’ from the Copy List menu
options.
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
There are three back-up options:
• Start new disc back-up – Start making a back-up of
a disc.
DVD to HDD Copy
Play List
DVD
1
2
3
4
4
• Resume writing data – Record the back-up data
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.
DVD
DVD
1/3
1/2
• Erase back-up data – Erase the back-up data on the
HDD.
Add
Erase
Move
HDD
HDD
1
2
3
Preview
Erase All
5
Press ꢃ OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and
load the disc you want to make a back-up of, then
close the disc tray.
Copy List
Erase all titles in the Copy List ?
Yes
Total 1h30m
Conf List
No
You can only make back-up copies of finalized Video
mode discs.
Disc Back-up
No Disc.
Please load a disc to be backed-up.
Start
Cancel
Note
1 See also Copyright on page 72.
2 It is not possible to play material on the HDD that has been backed-up from DVD.
84
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying and back-up
08
6
Select ‘Start’.
9
After the recorder has finished recording the
back-up disc, you can select whether to make
another back-up of the same data or exit.
Disc Back-up
Read from disc and save to HDD.
Start reading?
Disc Back-up
Disc back-up finished.
Start
Cancel
To make another back-up copy, please load
a recordable disc.
Start
Cancel
• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY.
• You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE
TOUCH COPY for more than one second.
• Select Start to make another back-up copy or Cancel
to finish. If you want to make another back-up copy,
return to step 6 above.
7
When the data has been copied, press ꢃ OPEN/
CLOSE to open the disc tray. Take out the disc and
load a blank* recordable DVD.
* If you’re using a DVD-RW, the disc doesn’t have to be
blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be
erased in the back-up process.
10 If you don’t need to keep the back-up data on
the HDD, you can delete it now.
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).
Disc Back-up
Disc Back-up
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.
Erasing it will increase the free space
available. OK to Erase?
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.
Please eject the disc and load a
recordable disc.
Yes
No
Start
Cancel
• If you decide to leave the back-up data on the HDD,
you can make back-up copies to recordable DVD
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.
You can use a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 disc, or DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 or
Ver. 1.2 / 4x for the back-up.
• If you back-up a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot
undo the finalization later.
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may
be cases where the contents of the disc you’re
backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If
this happens, please try another brand of disc.
8
Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data
to the blank disc.
Disc Back-up
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.
The disc contents will be overwritten.
OK to start?
Start
Cancel
• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY.
• You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE
TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However,
this will make the disc unusable (although if you are
using a DVD-RW disc you can re-initialize it in order
to make it usable again—see Initializing a DVD-RW
disc on page 70.)
85
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
CEhdapitetri9ng
Using the Disc Navigator you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD discs, as well as
video content on the internal hard disk drive (HDD). The editing features available in the Disc Navigator depend on
whether you are editing video on a Video mode or VR mode DVD, or the HDD, and whether you’re editing Original
content, or a Play List.
With unfinalized Video mode DVDs, there are a limited number of editing commands, including naming, locking and
erasing titles. Once a Video mode disc has been finalized, further editing is not possible.
There are two ways to edit VR mode DVD-RW discs. You can directly edit the Original content of the disc, or you can
create and edit a Play List. The Play List doesn’t actually change any of the content on the disc, but just controls how
the content is played back (rather like the program play feature found on CD players).
Editing material recorded on the HDD is similar to editing the Original content of a VR mode DVD-RW, with similar
commands for erasing, naming and locking titles, as well as fine control over the content of chapters within titles.
The Disc Navigator screen
DVD Disc Navigator
Edit mode
Currently selected title
Disc Navigator
Video Mode
DVD
1
2
3
6
Disc recording
mode
Locked title
indicator
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
4
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
0h30m40s
Disc Navigator
menu options
Play
5
Erase
Recording time
available in the displayed
recording mode
Ttl Name
Lock
Erase All
Undo
1/1
Number of title
pages
Information for
selected title
86
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
HDD Disc Navigator
Currently selected title
HDD group tabs
Disc Navigator
Group1
Group2
Group3
3
Group4
All
HDD
1
2
NEW
New indicator
Recording time
available in the displayed
recording mode
Selected Group
Disc Navigator
menu options
All
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time
HDD Remain
6h12m(FINE)
0h30m40s
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
4
5
6
Locked title
indicator
1/1
Number of title
pages
Information for
selected title
Auto Replace
Recording indicator
Important
ONE TOUCH
COPY
• Titles that have been recorded with a Line Input
setting different to the current setting of the recorder
are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank
thumbnail image. See also Input Line System on
page 108.
HDD
DVD
• During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator
for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a
mark. These titles were recorded with a Line Input
setting different to the current setting of the recorder.
During recording, these titles cannot be played.
CLEAR
DISC NAVIGATOR
PLAY LIST
ENTER
HOME
MENU
RETURN
PLAY
PREV
NEXT
DISPLAY
DVD RECORDER
87
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
1
Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or
• You can switch between the HDD and the DVD Disc
Navigator screens using the HDD and DVD buttons
(front panel or remote).
the DVD.
2
Press DISC NAVIGATOR to display the Disc
You can copy a selected HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to
HDD by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY (see also page 72
for more on One Touch Copy).
Navigator screen.
Playback will automatically stop when you do this.
When editing HDD content, a row of group names
appears above the title thumbnails (see Editing HDD
groups on page 93 for more details). You can access
these by pressing ꢀ (cursor up) repeatedly until the All
group is highlighted, then using the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/
right) buttons to select a group. Press ENTER to ‘open’
the highlighted group.
Disc Navigator
Original
DVD
1
4
2
5
3
6
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
Titles on the HDD marked with a
icon are timer
Undo
1/1
recordings set to Auto Replace Recording (see Editing a
scheduled recording on page 45).
• You can also access the Disc Navigator from the
Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Disc
Navigator then press ENTER).
Titles on the HDD marked with a
recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.
icon are recently
3
To exit the Disc Navigator, press HOME MENU.
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight
the command you want from the menu options on
the left, then press ENTER. Most commands require
you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from
the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the ꢀ/
ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) followed by ENTER to do
this.
Remember
• You can change the thumbnail pictures used for titles
using the NAVI MARK button—see Changing the
thumbnail picture for a title on page 52.
• When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the
PREV (ꢋ) and NEXT (ꢌ) buttons to display the
previous/next page if there are more than six titles/
nine chapters.
Disc Navigator menu options
The commands available from the Disc Navigator for the
VR mode and Video mode discs and the HDD are shown
below.
• As you highlight different thumbnails, information
about the title is shown in the central area of the
screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information
displayed.
Video mode
• If you are editing a VR mode disc, press PLAYLIST to
switch between Original and Play List Disc Navigator
screens.
• Play – Play a title (page 89)
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title
(page 90)
Playlist / Original indicator
• Lock/Unlock – Lock or unlock a title to prevent
accidental changes being made (page 92)
Disc Navigator
• Erase – Erase a title (page 89)
Play List
DVD
1
2
5
3
6
• Erase All – Erase all titles (page 93)
• Undo – Undo the last change (page 93)
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
4
VR mode
(Original)
• Play – Play a title (page 89)
1/1
Undo
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title
(page 90)
• Lock/Unlock – Lock or unlock a title to prevent
accidental changes being made (page 92)
• Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
the left from the thumbnail area of the Disc
Navigator.
• Erase – Erase a title (page 89)
• Erase All – Erase all titles (page 93)
88
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
• Undo – Undo the last change (page 93)
• Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Make detailed changes to
chapters in a title (page 91)
Editing VR mode Original, Video
mode and HDD content
• Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase a part of a title
(page 92)
These commands affect the actual content stored on the
DVD-R/RW or HDD.
HDD
Remember
• Play – Play a title (page 89)
• If you are editing a VR mode disc, use the PLAYLIST
button to switch to the Disc Navigator Original
screen.
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title
(page 90)
• Lock/Unlock – Lock or unlock a title to prevent
accidental changes being made (page 92)
Play
• Erase – Erase a title (page 89)
VR mode Video mode
HDD
• Erase All – Erase all titles (page 93)
Use this function to start playback of a title.
Select ‘Play’ from the Disc Navigator menu
• Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Make detailed changes
to chapters in a title (page 91)
1
• Divide – Divide a title into two (page 93)
options.
• Change Group (Chg Group) – Assign a title to a
group on the HDD (page 93)
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select the
title you want to play, then press ENTER or ꢅ PLAY.
• Group Name (Grp Name) – Name or rename an
HDD group (page 94)
Disc Navigator
Video Mode
DVD
• Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase part of a title
(page 92)
1
2
3
6
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
VR mode
(Play List)
Play
Erase
4
5
• Create – Make a new Play List title (page 96)
Ttl Name
Lock
Erase All
• Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Make detailed changes to
chapters in a Play List title (page 95)
Undo
1/1
• Move – Move the position of a title in the Play List
(page 97)
Playback of the title you selected starts.
• Erase All – Erase all titles in the Play List (page 98)
• Undo – Undo the last change (page 98)
• Play – Play a title (page 94)
Erase
VR mode Video mode
HDD
• Erase – Erase a title from the Play List (page 94)
The Erase title command does slightly different things
depending on what you are currently editing. If you are
editing Original content on a VR mode disc or content on
the HDD, the title will be erased from the disc and the
available recording time will increase accordingly.
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title in
the Play List (page 95)
• Combine – Combine two Play List titles into one
(page 98)
• Divide – Divide a Play List title into two (page 98)
If you erase titles from a Video mode DVD-R disc, the title
will disappear from the list of titles, but the available
recording time will not increase. Erasing a title from a
Video mode DVD-RW disc increases the available
recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.
• Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase a part of a title
(page 96)
89
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
1
Select ‘Erase’ from the Disc Navigator menu
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the ꢈ/ꢉ buttons to change the cursor
position.
options.
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select the
title you want to erase, then press ENTER.
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢋ/
ꢌ).
Disc Navigator
Original
DVD
1
2
3
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name). For other remote control
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name below.
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
4
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Play
Erase
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
Erase Title?
Undo
1/1
No
Yes
4
Highlight ‘OK’ then press ENTER to enter the
3
Highlight ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN.
press ENTER.
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to erase.
5
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to name.
Tip
Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name
The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts
that you can use to input characters in the name input
screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the
characters shown.
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing
ENTER. (You can also use this method to erase titles
when using the Play function, above.)
If you want to enter two characters in succession that are
both on the same button (for example a P and an R),
press ꢉ to advance the cursor one space manually
between inputting the two characters.
Title Name (Ttl Name)
VR mode Video mode
HDD
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long
for VR mode and HDD recordings and 32 characters for
Video mode recordings.
Key
1
Characters
Key
6
Characters
. , ’ ? ! – & 1
m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ
1
Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Disc Navigator menu
a b c 2 ä à á â ã
æ ç
p q r s 7 $
2
7
options.
*1
ÿ/ß
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select the
d e f 3 è é ë ê
g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡
j k l 5 £
t u v 8 ü ù û ú
w x y z 9
3
4
8
9
title you want to name, then press ENTER to go to
the name input screen.
3
Input a name for the selected title.
0
5
0
ꢈ
[cursor back]
[change case]
ꢉ
CLEAR
[cursor forward]
[clear character]
Input Title Name
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
ꢋ/
ꢌ
A B C D E F G H I
J
K L M .
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS
small
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z
(
I
ç
A A
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $
ꢊ
<space>
ꢄ
[finish name input]
_
&
~
}
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
±
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
© –
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14
/
~
o
1
1
3
2
3
+
¿
¶
–
/
2
/
4
( ) _ / : ; ” ` ^ @ # ∗ % ¥ | + =
´
OK
Clear
Space
{ } [ ] < >
*1
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) and ENTER to
select characters.
90
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as
you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD disc or 99
chapters per HDD title). Highlight Back and press
ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit screen.
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit)
VR mode
HDD
When editing VR mode DVDs or video on the HDD you
can edit individual chapters within a title, with
commands for erasing, combining and dividing. You
• Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into one:
1
Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent
2
can also play individual chapters to check their content.
chapters and press ENTER.
• Preview – Preview chapters: Select the chapter you
want to play; press ꢄ STOP to return to the chapter
edit screen.
1
Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Disc Navigator menu
options.
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select the
• Undo – Undo the last command (only works with VR
mode disc edits).
title that contains the chapters you want to edit,
then press ENTER.
3
Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
the left side of the screen.
Chapter Edit
Original
DVD
Title
1
Chapter
0h03m
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP
2
4
To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press
1
4
7
3
6
9
RETURN again, or select ‘Back’ from the menu
options on the left.
5
8
Erase
Divide
Combine
Preview
Undo
Inserting chapter markers into a title
VR mode
HDD
Back
1/1
You can create new chapters within a title using the CHP
3
MARK button while playing the title or during recording.
This is useful not just for navigation of the disc content
but also for editing purposes.
After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear
and you’ll see that the Disc Navigator menu items
change to the chapter editing commands:
• Erase – Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want
to erase and press ENTER (see also the note below).
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts:
Select the chapter you want to divide. From the
following screen use the playback controls (ꢅ, ꢊ,
ꢈ, ꢉ, etc.) to find the point at which you want to
divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press
ENTER.
PAUSE
ꢍ
ꢎ
CHP
MARK
Divide Chapter
Original
1
Start playback of the title you want to create
DVD
Title 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h01m24s
Chapter
0h00m
1
new chapter markers in.
You can use the Play command from the Disc Navigator
1-3
ꢊ Play Pause
0.00.52.17
menu to do this.
Divide
Back
Divide
Note
1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.
2 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle
chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one.
3 • If you pause a recording in VR mode, the recorder automatically starts a new chapter when you restart the recording.
• When recording in Video mode, the recorder automatically puts chapter markers in at regular intervals. It is not possible to add extra chapter
markers manually after recording (see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 118).
• The Play List and Original content on a disc can each contain up to 999 chapters.
• Each HDD title can contain a maximum of 99 chapters.
• Similar chapter editing commands are available for HDD content from the HDD to DVD copy screen. See also Copying from HDD to DVD on
page 73.
91
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
2
Press CHP MARK at any point where you want a
4
In the same way, find the end of the section to
new chapter to begin.
A chapter marker icon appears on-screen briefly to
confirm a new chapter mark has been inserted:
erase, then (with ‘To’ highlighted) press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker appears under the
bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself
marked in red.
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
• For greater control over the exact position of chapter
markers it can be useful to use the ꢊ PAUSE button
and/or the slow-motion and frame advance/reverse
controls (ꢍ/ꢎ).
• When editing VR mode Original content, you may not
be able to erase very short sections (less than five
seconds).
Erase Section (Erase Sec)
6
Erase another section from the same title, or
VR mode
HDD
press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator
screen.
Using this command you can delete a part of an Original
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a
recording made from the TV.
Lock / Unlock
VR mode Video mode
HDD
1
Select ‘Erase Sec’ from the Disc Navigator menu
options.
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased
accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock
it later.
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select a
title.
After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from
which you can mark the start and end points of the
section to erase.
Important
• You can’t undo any edits made before changing the
lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock
command using the Undo option from the Disc
Navigator menu.
Erase Sec
Original
DVD
15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h01m24s
Title
1
1-1
ꢊ Play Pause
0.00.52.17
1
Select ‘Lock’ from the Disc Navigator menu
A
B
options.
Erase Sec
Back
From
To
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select the
title you want to lock (or unlock), then press ENTER.
Disc Navigator
Original
DVD
3
Use the playback controls (ꢅ, ꢊ, ꢈ, ꢉ, etc.) to
1
2
3
find the start of the section to erase, then (with
‘From’ highlighted) press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
appears under the bar to show the start of the section.
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP
4
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Lock
Erase All
1/1
Undo
ꢊ Play Pause
A
B
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator
with a padlock icon.
From
0.02.09.17
T
3
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
A
menu options, or select another title to lock/unlock.
92
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
2
Select the title that you want to divide, then
Erase All
press ENTER.
VR mode Video mode
HDD
This erases all unlocked titles from the disc (see also Lock
Divide Title
/ Unlock on page 92).
15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h01m24s
HDD
Title
2
1
Select ‘Erase All’ from the Disc Navigator menu
2-1
ꢊ Play Pause
0.00.08.26
options.
Divide
Back
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
Divide
press ENTER.
Disc Navigator
Original
DVD
1
2
3
3
Use the standard playback controls to find the
place you want to divide the title.
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Lock
Erase All
4
With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide
4
the title at the current playback position.
5
title.
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm you want to divide the
Erase all titles?
Undo
1/1
No
Yes
Select No if you want to cancel and leave the title intact.
6
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
Undo
menu options, or select another title to divide.
VR mode Video mode
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,
you can undo the last three edits you made).
Editing HDD groups
HDD
•
Select ‘Undo’ from the Disc Navigator menu
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize
your HDD video content there are four ‘groups’. You can
move content from group to group, and rename the
groups as you want.
options.
• You can’t undo anything after ejecting the disc from
the recorder or switching the recorder into standby.
• You can’t undo the following operations: initializing,
recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking
titles.
Change Group (Chg Group)
Divide
HDD
HDD
Use this command to assign titles to a particular group.
Use this command to divide a title on the HDD into two.
Note that once divided, the two new titles cannot be
recombined into one again.
1
Select ‘Chg Group’ from the Disc Navigator
menu, then press ENTER.
2
Select the title that you want to put into a
1
Select ‘Divide’ from the Disc Navigator menu
different group, then press ENTER.
options.
93
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
a group for the title, then press ENTER.
• You can select one of the four groups, or choose No
Group, in which case it will only appear when All is
selected.
Creating and editing a VR mode Play
List
VR mode
A Play List is a kind of virtual content based on the actual
(Original) content of the disc. The main advantages of
this type of editing is that it is non-destructive of the video
content on the disc, and it allows greater control over
editing, so that you end up with the content exactly as you
want it.
Disc Navigator
HDD
21:00 Fri 6/09 Pr 5 LP
Title 1
No Group
All
Group1
Lock
Erase All
Grp Name
Chg Group
Group2
Group3
Group4
Divide
Remember
• Use the PLAYLIST button to switch to the Play List
edit screen.
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
• The Play List can contain a maximum of 99 titles.
menu options, or select another title to change the
group of.
Play
VR mode
Group Name (Grp Name)
HDD
Use this function to start playback of a title.
Use this command to rename a group.
1
Select ‘Play’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
1
Select ‘Grp Name’ from the Disc Navigator menu.
2
Select the title you want to play, then press
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
ENTER.
the group that you want to name or rename, then
press ENTER.
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
Input Group Name
Group 1
1
2
3
A B C D E F G H I
J
K L M .
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS
small
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z
(
I
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
4
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
ç
A A
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
Play
Erase
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $
_
&
~
}
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
±
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
¨
© –
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
µ
¶
–
/2
/4
´
Undo
1/1
OK
Clear
Space
Playback of the title you selected starts.
3
Input a name for the group.
The name can be up to six characters long.
Erase
4
To finish entering the name, highlight ‘Exit’ and
VR mode
press ENTER.
This command erases a title only from the Play List. The
title remains in the Original content and the available
recording time does not increase.
5
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another group to name.
1
Select ‘Erase’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
94
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
2
Select the title you want to erase, then press
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
ENTER.
4
Highlight ‘OK’, then press ENTER to fix the name
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN.
1
2
3
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
4
5
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Play
Erase
menu options, or select another title to name.
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit)
Erase Title?
Undo
1/1
No
Yes
VR mode
When editing VR mode DVDs you can edit individual
chapters within a title, with commands for erasing,
moving, combining and dividing. You can also play
individual chapters to check their content.
3
Highlight ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to erase.
1
Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Disc Navigator Play
List menu options.
Title Name (Ttl Name)
2
Select the title that contains the chapters you
want to edit, then press ENTER.
VR mode
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters
long.
After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear
and you’ll see that the Disc Navigator menu items
change to the chapter editing commands:
1
Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Disc Navigator Play
List menu options.
Chapter Edit
Play List
DVD
2
Select the title you want to name, then press
Title
1
Chapter
0h03m
15:00 Wed11/12 Pr 5 LP
2
ENTER.
1
4
7
3
6
9
3
Input a name for the selected title.
5
8
Erase
Divide
Combine
Move
Input Title Name
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
Undo
A B C D E F G H I
J
K L M .
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS
small
Back
1/1
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z
(
I
ç
A A
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $
_
&
~
}
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
±
|
¡
_
• Erase – Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want
to erase and press ENTER.
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
© –
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¶
–
/
2
/
4
´
OK
Clear
Space
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts:
Select the chapter you want to divide. From the
following screen use the playback controls (ꢅ, ꢊ,
ꢈ, ꢉ, etc.) to find the point at which you want to
divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press
ENTER.
Press ENTER after selecting each character.
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the ꢈ/ꢉ buttons to change the cursor
position.
Divide Chapter
Play List
DVD
Title 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h01m24s
Chapter
0h00m
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢋ/
ꢌ).
1
1-3
ꢊ Play Pause
0.00.52.17
Divide
Back
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name). For other remote control
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name on page 90.
Divide
95
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as
you want (up to 999 chapters per disc). Highlight
Back and press ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit
screen.
3
Use the playback controls (ꢅ, ꢊ, ꢈ, ꢉ, etc.) to
find the start of the section to erase, then (with
‘From’ highlighted) press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
appears under the bar to show the start of the section.
• Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into one:
Select the dividing line between two adjacent
chapters and press ENTER.
• Move – Rearrange chapters: Select the chapter you
want to move, press ENTER, then highlight the new
location for it, then press ENTER again.
ꢊ Play Pause
A
B
From
0.02.09.17
T
• Preview – Preview chapters: Select the chapter you
want to play; press ꢄ STOP to return to the chapter
edit screen.
A
• Undo – Undo the last command.
4
In the same way, find the end of the section to
3
Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
the left side of the screen.
erase, then (with ‘To’ highlighted) press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker appears under the
bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself
marked in red.
4
To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press
RETURN again, or select ‘Back’ from the menu
options on the left.
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
Erase Section (Erase Sec)
VR mode
Using this command you can delete a part of a Play List
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a
recording made from the TV.
6
Erase another section from the same title, or
press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator
screen.
1
Select ‘Erase Sec’ from the Disc Navigator menu
options.
Create
2
title.
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select a
VR mode
Use this function to add an Original title to the Play List.
When you do this, the whole title is put into the Play List
(you can erase bits you don’t need later—see Chapter Edit
(Chpt Edit) on page 95).
After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from
which you can mark the start and end points of the
section to erase.
The title appears in the Play List complete with the
chapter markers that appear in the Original. However, if
you add more chapter markers to the Original later, these
are not automatically copied over into the Play List title.
Erase Sec
Play List
DVD
15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h01m24s
Title
1
1-2
ꢊ Play Pause
0.00.52.17
A
B
You can add up to 99 titles to the Play List.
Erase Sec
Back
From
To
96
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
1
Select ‘Create’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
Move
menu options.
VR mode
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select the
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play
List titles.
insertion point for the new title, then press ENTER.
1
Select ‘Move’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
Disc Navigator
Play List
menu options.
DVD
1
2
2
Select the title you want to move, then press
ENTER.
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
1
2
3
Undo
1/1
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP
4
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
If there are no titles in the Play List yet, this step does not
apply.
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select an
Undo
1/1
Original title to put into the Play List.
3
Select a new position in the Play List for the title,
Disc Navigator
Play List
then press ENTER.
DVD
ORG1
ORG2
ORG3
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP
ORG4
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
1
2
3
Divide
Combine
Erase All
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
Undo
1/1
4
Divide
Combine
Erase All
4
Press ENTER to add the title.
Undo
1/1
The new title appears in the updated Play List.
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
1
2
3
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to move.
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
Undo
1/1
5
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another location for a new
title.
97
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
09
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
Divide
VR mode
Use this command to split a title up into two new titles.
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
1
Select ‘Divide’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
1
2
3
menu options.
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
2
Select the title that you want to divide, then
Create
Move
Divide
press ENTER.
Combine
Erase All
3
Use the playback controls to find the place you
want to divide the title.
1/1
Undo
Divide Chapter
Play List
DVD
3
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Recording Time 0h01m24s
Title
1
menu options, or continue combining more titles.
1-1
ꢊ Play Pause
0.00.08.26
Divide
Back
Erase All
Divide
VR mode
This command erases all the titles from the Play List.
1
Select ‘Erase All’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
You can use all the usual playback controls, including
ꢅ PLAY, ꢊ PAUSE, scan (ꢈ, ꢉ), and slow-motion
(ꢍ, ꢎ).
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
4
With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
the title at the current playback position.
1
2
3
5
To return to the Disc Navigator menu options,
select ‘Back’ and press ENTER.
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
4
Combine
VR mode
Erase all titles?
Undo
1/1
No
Yes
Use this function to combine two adjacent Play List titles
into one.
1
Select ‘Combine’ from the Disc Navigator Play
Undo
List menu options.
VR mode
2
Highlight the bar divider between the two titles
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,
you can undo the last three edits you made).
you want to combine, then press ENTER.
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD
•
Select ‘Undo’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
1
4
2
3
menu options.
• You can’t undo anything after ejecting the disc from
the recorder or switching the recorder into standby.
DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
Create
Move
Divide
Combine
Erase All
• You can’t undo the following operations: initializing,
recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking
titles.
1/1
Undo
98
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc History
10
Chapter 10
Disc History
VR mode Video mode
1
The Disc History screen lets you see how much recording space remains on the last 30 recordable DVD discs loaded.
2
It also displays information such as disc name , the first three title names, number of titles recorded, recording mode
and the lock status of the disc.
Available
recording space
Disc name
Disc History
1/2
LP
Recording mode
Disc Name
News
Sport
Travel
Movie
Music
DVD Remain
Disc loaded
1h54m
2h35m
1h22m
0h30m
1h38m
Selected disc
Recording time
available
Other discs
Number of
Title information
for the selected
disc
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
Today's Football
Enjoy Golf!
Social dance Lesson
Titles
:
8
titles on disc
DVD-RW VR
System
625
Disc type and
recording mode
Recorded Line
System of disc
Disc lock indicator
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to see
title information for other discs in the list.
• To remove a disc from the list, press CLEAR (you
can’t remove the currently loaded disc).
Using the Disc History
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc History’ to
display the Disc History screen.
The most recently loaded disc appears at the top of the
list, with previously loaded discs below it. If there is a
disc loaded, it is shown in the list with a ‘disc in’ icon.
• You can see the available recording time for different
recording modes by pressing the REC MODE
3
4
button.
3
To exit the Disc History screen, press HOME
MENU.
• The Disc History screen is also accessible from the
Home Menu.
Note
1 When a Video mode disc is finalized, the information for that disc disappears from the Disc History.
2 When you initialize a DVD-RW disc or record a DVD-R disc for the first time, the recorder automatically names the disc DISC ** (where ** is
a number from 1 to 99). You can rename the disc if you want to (see Input Disc Name on page 102).
3 The following discs appear in the Disc History list in gray:
• Discs with no available recording space left
• Locked discs
• Discs that contain the maximum 99 titles and/or 999 chapters
• Discs recorded with a Line Input setting different to the recorder’s current setting.
4 When you change the display for the available recording time using the REC MODE button, only the display is changed; the actual recording
mode is not affected.
99
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PhotoViewer
11
Chapter 11
The PhotoViewer
1
2
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW on your TV.
Currently selected thumbnail
PhotoViewer
File
Chair No. 2
x
Date/Time 10:00 12/05/2003
Size 1920 1440
File information
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
01. 12/12 TUE
02. 13/12 WED
03. 14/12 THU
04. 15/12 FRI
05. 16/12 SAT
06. 17/12 SUN
07. 18/12 MON
08. 19/12 TUE
Currently selected
folder in folder list
Pages in file
view
Pages in
folder list
1/2
1/3
6
Press ꢄ STOP or RETURN to return to the
thumbnail view area.
Playing a slideshow
7
To return to the folder view area, press RETURN.
• To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU.
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoViewer’ to
display the PhotoViewer screen.
• The PhotoViewer is only accessible when a disc
containing JPEG files is loaded.
Reloading files from a disc
If you have a disc with a large number of files and/or
folders, you can still view all the images using the reload
function.
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
a folder from the folder list.
The first nine images from the selected folder are
3
displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen.
1
Use the ꢁ (cursor down) button to navigate to
the last entry in the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).
3
Press ENTER to move to the thumbnail view area.
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.
2
Press ENTER to load the next batch of up to 999
• To get back to the folder list, press RETURN.
files/99 folders from the disc.
It will take a moment (at most a minute) to load in the
images.
4
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to select a
thumbnail.
• Use the ꢋ and ꢌ buttons to display the previous/
next page of thumbnails.
5
Press ENTER or ꢅ PLAY to start playing a
slideshow from the selected thumbnail.
• Use the ꢋ PREV / NEXT ꢌ buttons to display the
previous/next picture, or the ꢊ PAUSE button to
pause the slideshow.
Note
1 • Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still possible to view them all using the
Reload function.
• The time it takes for the recorder to load a file increases with large file sizes.
• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that the disc and file formats are compatible with this recorder (see JPEG file compatibility
on page 10).
2 Pictures with an aspect ratio different to your TV screen will appear with black bars top and bottom, or either side (depending on the picture).
3 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will
resume reloading.)
100
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PhotoViewer
11
Zooming the screen
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move
the area of the picture displayed.
1
During a slideshow, use the CHANNEL + button
to zoom the picture.
2x Zoom
ꢅ
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and
4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) to move the
zoomed area within the picture.
Rotating the screen
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow
so you can always view pictures the right way up,
whichever way they were taken.
•
During a slideshow, press ANGLE to rotate the
displayed picture clockwise by 90º.
Press ANGLE repeatedly to continue rotating the picture
in increments of 90º.
ꢅ
101
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Disc Setup menu
12
Chapter 12
The Disc Setup menu
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure,
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is
accessed from the Home menu:
• Use the ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) and ENTER to
select characters.
• Use the ꢈ/ꢉ buttons to change the cursor
position.
•
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢋ/
ꢌ).
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name). For other remote control
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name on page 90.
Basic settings
Input Disc Name
VR mode Video mode
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder
automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from
DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name
function to change the default disc name to something
more descriptive. This name appears when you load the
disc and when you display disc information on-screen.
Note
• You cannot input a name for a disc if the TV line
system of the disc is different to the current setting of
the recorder. See Input Line System on page 108 for
how to change the recorder’s setting.
1
Select ‘Input Disc Name’ from the Basic options,
then ‘Next Screen’.
Lock Disc
Disc Setup
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
Next Screen
VR mode
• Default setting: Off
Optimize HDD
Disc Setup
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
On
Off
2
Input a name for the disc up to 64 characters long
Optimize HDD
for a VR mode disc, or 32 for a Video mode disc.
Input Disc Name
DISC7
A B C D E F G H I
J
K L M .
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or
CAPS
small
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z
(
I
ç
A A
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $
1
_
&
to make edits, select Off.
~
}
–
/
@
¥
ˆ
±
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
¨
© –
¬
–
®
˚
`
< < 14
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
µ
¶
–
/2
/4
´
OK
Clear
Space
Important
• A locked disc can still be initialized (which will
completely erase the disc).
Note
1 You cannot change the lock setting for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line
System on page 108 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
102
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Disc Setup menu
12
Optimize HDD
Initialize settings
DVD-RW
HDD
The Optimize HDD option is only visible when the
recorder determines that the HDD needs optimizing
(you’ll see a message appear on-screen recommending
you optimize the HDD).
You can initialize a DVD-RW disc for either VR mode
recording or Video mode recording. The first time you
load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically
initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto
Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see page 118).
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file
system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the
HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented
files.
The initialize menu here lets you reinitialize a disc, for
example if you want to change the recording format of
the disc. See Initializing a DVD-RW disc on page 70 for
detailed instructions.
Optimizing the HDD can take up to eight hours to
complete, and in the meantime no other operation is
possible. It is however possible to cancel optimization,
should you need to.
Finalize settings
•
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu.
Finalize
Disc Setup
DVD-R
DVD-RW
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Start Optimization
Start
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
Optimize HDD
1
See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on
page 69 for detailed instructions.
• Select ‘Start’ to optimize.
A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go.
Undo Finalize
DVD-RW
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded
on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you
want to record more material or edit material already on
the disc.
HDD Initialize
HDD
When your DVD recorder is working without a problem
this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu.
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for
some reason, you initialize the HDD to fix the problem.
Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it.
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If
when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be
recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this
command to be able to record on the disc using this
recorder.
•
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu.
1
From the Disc Setup menu, select ‘Finalize’, then
Disc Setup
‘Undo Finalize’ from the finalize options.
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Initialize
Start
2
Select ‘Start’.
Initialize HDD
• Select ‘Start’ to initialize.
Note
1 You cannot finalize a disc or use the Undo Finalize command if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder.
See Input Line System on page 108 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
103
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
13
Chapter 13
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
Using the Video/Audio Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc
playback, and for recording.
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings.
Setting the picture quality for TV and
external inputs
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality
settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external
input. There are several preset settings that suit various
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
Pr 5
Memory1
Choosing a preset
Detailed Settings
1
With the recorder stopped, press HOME MENU
and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
the picture quality setting you want to adjust.
Pr 5
Memory1
GUIDE Plus+
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Prog. Motion
Fast
Slow
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
Auto
On
PureCinema
Subtitle Adjust
3-D Y/C
YNR
Easy Timer
Disc History
Motion
Still
PhotoViewer
Off
Off
Off
Max
Max
Max
CNR
Detail
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to
You can adjust the following settings:
change the preset.
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive.
Pr 5
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
Tuner
Detailed Settings
progressive scan. Usually this is best left set to Auto;
try switching to Off if the picture appears unnatural.
• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the
built-in TV tuner and the external inputs.
• Subtitle Adjust – When the video output is set to
progressive scan, it’s possible that the subtitles in
some movies will disappear unnaturally. In this case
select the On setting.
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to change the
channel of the built-in TV tuner.
There are six presets available:
• Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts
• VCR – suitable for video cassettes
• LDP – suitable for Laserdiscs
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/colour separation
(NTSC video only).
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the C (colour) component.
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
• Memory3 – user preset 3
• White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level
adjustment.
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for
the current preset.
4
Press ENTER to select the preset.
104
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
13
1
• Memory3 – user preset 3
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for
the current preset (TV(CRT), PDP or Professional).
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video only).
4
Press ENTER to select the preset.
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of
darker images.
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ(cursor left/right) buttons to adjust
2
Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed
the currently selected picture quality setting.
Settings’.
5
When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
You can now use the preset for any other input or the
built-in TV tuner.
Memory1
Detailed Settings
3
Select the picture quality setting you want to
Tip
adjust.
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
Memory1
Prog. Motion
Fast
Slow
Auto 1
On
PureCinema
Subtitle Adjust
YNR
Off
Off
Off
Off
Max
Max
Max
Max
Setting the picture quality for disc
playback
CNR
MNR
BNR
This setting determines how the picture will look when
playing discs.
You can adjust the following settings:
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive.
Choosing a preset
1
With a disc playing (or paused), press HOME
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
progressive scan. Usually this is best left set to
Auto 1; try switching to Auto 2 or Off if the picture
appears unnatural.
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to
change the setting.
• Subtitle Adjust – When the video output is set to
progressive scan, it’s possible that the subtitles in
some movies will disappear unnaturally. In this case
select the On setting.
TV(CRT)
Detailed Settings
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
There are six presets available:
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the C (colour) component.
• TV(CRT) – suitable for standard cathode-ray tube TVs
• PDP – suitable for plasma display screens
• Professional – suitable for professional monitors
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the mosquito noise (artefacts visible
around the edge of an image, caused by MPEG
compression).
• Memory2 – user preset 2
Note
1 When White AGC is On, the White Level setting can’t be adjusted.
105
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
13
• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of
flat color, caused by MPEG compression).
Exactly how much difference you can hear between the
settings will depend on the material.
• Sharpness High – Adjusts the sharpness of the high-
frequency (detailed) elements in the picture.
Remember
• Audio DRC is not effective when listening to a disc via
the digital output when Dolby Digital Out is set to
Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the dynamic range
from your AV amplifier/receiver.
• Sharpness Mid – Adjusts the sharpness of the mid-
frequency (less detailed) elements in the picture.
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video only).
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of
darker images.
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
• Chroma Delay – Adjust to correct the gap between
the Y and C components in the video signal.
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ(cursor left/right) buttons to adjust
the currently selected picture quality setting.
5
When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
Audio DRC
• Default setting: Off
When watching Dolby Digital material at low volume, it’s
easy to lose low level sounds completely—including
some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DRC (Dynamic
Range Control) can help by bringing up the low level
sounds, while controlling high level peaks.
1
During playback or when paused, press HOME
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2
3
Select ‘Audio Adjust’.
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ(cursor left/right) buttons to adjust
DRC from ‘Off‘ to ‘Max’.
Audio Adjust
Audio DRC
Off
Max
106
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Chapter 14
The Initial Setup menu
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
that broadcasts a clock signal, then move the
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
Using the Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various
recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.
Initial Setup
•
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.
Basic
Tuner
C
l
o
c
k
Auto Clock Setting
Input
On S
Front
Powe
Remo
AV Li
Setup
Date
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Time
Pr 1
Clock Set CH
Start
GUIDE Plus+
Disc Navigator
Copy
Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode
If the time could not be set automatically, press
RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select
Manual.
Easy Timer
Disc History
PhotoViewer
•
Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
signals, you can set the clock manually:
• Some settings can only be changed when the
recorder is stopped. During playback these settings
are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.
Set your time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
to GMT.
• Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are
exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Manual Clock Setting
Clock
Input
1/2
Basic settings
England
London
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On Sc
Time Zone
Front
Powe
Remo
Summer Time
Off
Clock Setting
The date (day, month, year) and time must be set before
you can use any of the timer recording features.
AV Li
Setup
The clock can be set automatically if there is a broadcast
station transmitting clock signals, or manually.
Move the cursor down and select ‘On’ for
summer time if you are currently on summer
time, then press ENTER.
Select Auto to set the clock automatically or Manual to
display the clock setting screen.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Clock
Manual Clock Setting
Initial Setup
1/2
Input
England
London
Basic
Tuner
Clock Setting
Auto
Manual
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On S
Time Zone
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Mode
AV Link
Front
Powe
Remo
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
On
Summer Time
Setu
Setup Navigator
•
Auto clock setting
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together
with the program. This recorder can use these
signals to set the clock automatically.
107
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then
press ENTER to make all the settings.
Front Panel Display
• Default setting: On
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
Manual Clock Setting
Clock
Basic
Tuner
2/2
Basic
Tuner
Clock Setting
On
Off
Input
On Sc
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Mode
AV Link
Date
THU 01
01
00
2004
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Time
Front
00
Powe
Remo
England
London
Time Zone
Setup
On
Summer Time
Setup Navigator
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to change
On the default setting, the time is shown in the front
panel display when the recorder is in standby. Switch to
Off to have the front panel display switch off completely
the value in the highlighted field.
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to move
from one field to another.
2
when in standby.
Input Line System
• Default setting: 625System
Power Save
• Default setting: Off
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Clock Setting
525System
625System
Basic
Tuner
Clock Setting
Mode1
Mode2
Off
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Mode
AV Link
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Mode
AV Link
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
For standard PAL or SECAM recording, leave the input
line system to 625System. When recording an NTSC or
PAL–60 signal through an external input, change to
When set to Off, signals arriving at the ANTENNA IN
terminal and at the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV
connector are passed through to the ANTENNA OUT
terminal and to the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector,
respectively, when the recorder is in standby.
1
525System.
You can cut the standby power consumption of the
recorder by turning off the through function for one or
both terminals :
On Screen Display
• Default setting: On
3
• Mode1 – Through function only for the antenna
Initial Setup
terminal
Basic
Tuner
Clock Setting
On
Off
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Mode
AV Link
• Mode2 – No through function
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
• Off – Through function for both antenna terminal
and AV connector
Setup Navigator
On the default setting, the recorder shows on-screen
operation displays (Play, Stop and so on). Change to Off
to hide these displays.
Note
1 • When the current input is a built-in tuner channel preset, changing the input line system will usually also affect the input line system of the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) input. However if the AV2/L1 In setting is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 113), then the L2 input is affected
instead.
• If, when this setting is changed, the screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding
the front panel ꢄ button then pressing STOP REC (also front panel) while the recorder is stopped.
• When you switch the Input Line System setting the Copy List is erased.
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems on the same disc.
• When you change this setting, the Input Colour System setting also changes (see Input Colour System on page 111).
2 When set to Off, the display still lights dimly in standby when setting a timer recording.
3 When a timer recording is set with VPS/PDC on, SCART through is always active.
108
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Remote Control Mode
• Default setting: Recorder1
Setup Navigator
• Default setting: n/a
You only need to set this if you are using more than one
Pioneer DVD recorder in the same room.
Initial Setup
Basic
Clock Setting
Start
Tuner
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Mode
AV Link
Initial Setup
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Basic
Tuner
Clock Setting
Recorder1
Recorder2
Recorder3
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Mode
AV Link
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup Navigator
The Setup Navigator appears automatically when you
switch on the recorder for the first time (or after resetting
the recorder). It is also available from the Initial Settings
menu should you need it at any other time.
Setup Navigator
So that each remote control operates only its own
recorder, make this setting different for each recorder
and remote in the room.
See also Switching on and setting up on page 26.
There are three different recorder IDs. When set to
Recorder2 or Recorder3, the remote control mode is
shown in the front panel display.
Tuner settings
After selecting a new recorder ID, you have to confirm the
change by selecting Yes or No (use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor
left/right) buttons), then pressing ENTER.
Auto Channel Setting : Auto Scan
This recorder has a built-in TV tuner for recording PAL B/
G, PAL I, SECAM L and SECAM D/K TV programs off the
air or from analog cable TV. We recommend that you first
use the Auto Channel Setting described here to tune into
the channels in your area, then if there are any unwanted
channels, you can disable them using Channel Skip
(described below). You can also fine-tune individual
stations using the Manual CH Setting feature. See
Manual CH Setting below for how to use this.
Note that as soon as you change the recorder ID, the
remote becomes inoperative until you change the remote
to the same ID.
To set the remote, press and hold RETURN and a number
button (1, 2 or 3) until the indicator on the remote lights.
AV Link
• Default setting: This Recorder Only
1
Choose ‘Tuner’ from the Initial Setup menu, then
Initial Setup
‘Auto Channel Setting’, then ‘Auto Scan’.
Basic
Tuner
Clock Setting
This Recorder Only
Pass Through
Input Line System
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Power Save
Remote Control Mode
AV Link
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
Auto Scan
Download from TV
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Setup Navigator
This setting determines how AV Link signals are handled
when the recorder is in standby. Choose the This
Recorder Only setting for AV Link signals to affect only
this recorder. Choose Pass Through to have this
recorder pass on AV Link signals to other connected
devices without affecting this recorder.
2
Select your country then press ENTER to start
tuning.
Initial Setup
Basic
Auto Channel Setting
AutoC
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Manu
Chann
Country
UK
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
• You can cancel before auto tuning has finished by
pressing ENTER again.
109
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
After auto scanning has finished, the channel mapping
screen appears showing which channels have been
assigned to which program numbers.
Manual CH Setting
The channel skip function lets you skip channels where
there is no station so that as you change channels using
the CHANNEL +/– buttons, you only change to channels
that have a station.
Initial Setup
The manual tuning function allows you to manually tune
to stations, should you need to.
1/7
Channel Mapping
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
System
CH Name
Pr
9
System
CH Name
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
26
33
23
30
37
35
39
26
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
25
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
Select ‘Manual CH Setting’, then ‘Next Screen’.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
Next Screen
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/next
page.
3
Press HOME MENU to exit this screen.
Press ENTER to go to the country setting screen.
Auto Channel Setting : Download from TV
If you connected this recorder to your TV using the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector, and if your TV supports this
function, you can download all the channels that your TV
is tuned to. Check your TV’s instruction manual for more
details.
2
Select your country.
Initial Setup
Manual Channel Setting
Auto C
Basic
Chann
Tuner
Manua
Country
UK
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
1
2
3
Choose ‘Download from TV’.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
Auto Scan
Download from TV
3
Press ENTER to go to the manual channel setting
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
screen.
Pr 1
Skip
Off
UK & IE
2
CH System
Channel
AFT
Select your country.
On
Level
Sound System
Name
I
Initial Setup
Decoder
Off
Auto Channel Setting
AutoCh
Basic
Tuner
Manua
Chann
Country
UK
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons or the number
buttons to change channels.
From this screen there are eight parameters you can set:
• Skip – If you want to skip the displayed channel
(because there is no station assigned to that
channel), change the Skip setting to On.
Press ENTER to start downloading.
Downloading
Pr 5
• CH System – Set the channel system used in your
area or region.
Cancel
• Channel – Change the channel number assigned to
the current preset.
After downloading has finished, the channel mapping
screen appears showing which channels have been
assigned to which program numbers.
• AFT (Auto Fine Tune) – When set to On, the station is
automatically tuned; set to Off to manually fine tune
(see below).
• Level – Set the AFT level (see above).
• Sound System – Set the sound system used for the
current channel.
110
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
• Name – Move the cursor right then input a name for
the current station, (up to five characters) then press
ENTER.
4
Press ꢃ (cursor right), then select a preset
station to swap with the first preset.
• Decoder – If the current channel is scrambled,
requiring a decoder connected to the AV2(INPUT 1/
DECODER) connector, set this to On. (See also AV2/
L1 In on page 113.)
Initial Setup
[1]
1/17
CH Name
[2]
1/17
CH Name
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
I
I
I
I
I
I
CC40
I
I
I
I
I
I
CC40
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
Channel Swapping
5
3
Swap Preset
The preset swap feature lets you swap the channel
assignments of different programs. This is so that you
can group together station presets which naturally go
together.
5
6
Press ENTER to swap the presets.
If you want to swap more presets, press ꢂ
1
Select ‘Channel Swapping’.
(cursor left), then repeats steps 3 to 5.
7
Press HOME MENU to finish and exit.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Auto Channel Setting
Manual CH Setting
Channel Swapping
Next Screen
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Video In / Out settings
Input Colour System
• Default setting: Auto
2
Select ‘Next Screen’ to go to the swap presets
screen.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Input Colour System
Component Video Out
AV1 Out
AV2/L1 In
NTSC on PAL TV
Next Screen
Initial Setup
[1]
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
1/17
CH Name
[2]
1/17
CH Name
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
I
I
I
I
I
I
CC40
I
I
I
I
I
I
CC40
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
On the default setting, the recorder automatically detects
whether the video signal from the built-in tuner or from
one of the external inputs is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or
PAL–60. You may, however, occasionally need to set it
manually if the picture is not displayed properly.
1
1
Swap Preset
3
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ (cursor up/down) buttons to select
a preset station to swap.
• Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/
1
Select ‘Input Colour System’, then ‘Next Screen’.
next page.
2
Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons or the INPUT
SELECT button to switch between the built-in tuner
and the external inputs.
Initial Setup
[1]
1/17
[2]
1/17
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
CH Name
CC40
2
3
4
5
6
Pr
1
2
3
4
5
6
System
CH Name
CC40
2
3
4
5
6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to
change the input colour system for the current input
or built-in tuner.
5
1
Swap Preset
Pr 5
Auto
• The available settings depend on the Input Line
System setting (see Input Line System on page 108).
The table below shows the different options available.
111
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Important
Input Line System Built-in tuner External input
If you switch to one of the progressive settings when
using a TV that is not compatible with progressive-scan
video, you will not be able to see anything displayed on
your TV. If this happens, press and hold the ꢄ button on
the front panel, then press DISC NAVIGATOR. This will
set the recorder’s video output back to Interlace.
625 System
Auto
PAL
Auto
PAL
SECAM
n/a
SECAM
Auto
525 System
Compatibility of this unit with progressive-scan TVs
Consumers should note that not all high-definition television sets
are fully compatible with this product and may cause artifacts to
be displayed in the picture. In case of 525 progressive scan
picture problems, it is recommended that the user switch the
connection to the ‘standard definition’ output (Interlace). If there
are questions regarding our TV set compatibility with this model,
please contact our customer service center.
3.58 NTSC
PAL–60
Component Video Out
• Default setting: Interlace
This recorder is compatible with the following Pioneer displays
and monitors
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to your TV using the component video jacks.
Plasma display
• PDP-505XDE, PDP-435XDE, PDP-505HDE, PDP-435HDE, PDP-
435FDE, PDP-615EX, PDP-505HD, PDP-5030HD, PDP-4330HD,
PDP-5040HD, PDP-4340HD, Pro-1000HD, Pro-800HD, Pro-
1000HDI, Pro-800HDI, Pro-1110HD, Pro-910HD, PDP-4300, PDP-
5031, PDP-502MX
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Input Colour System
Component Video Out
AV1 Out
AV2/L1 In
NTSC on PAL TV
Interlace
Progressive (Full)
Progressive (Normal)
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Projection monitor receiver
• SD-533HD5, SD-643HD5, Pro-710HD, Pro-610HD, Pro-510HD,
Pro-720HD, Pro-620HD, Pro-520HD, Pro-730HD, Pro-630HD, Pro-
530HD, Pro-730HDI, Pro-530HDI, Pro-700HD, SD-641HD5, SD-
582HD5, SD-532HD5
If your TV is compatible with progressive-scan
component video, set this Progressive (Full) for the
highest quality picture. (If when set to Progressive (Full)
4:3 programs are ‘stretched’ and you can’t fix this with
the controls on your TV, try the Progressive (Normal)
setting.)
AV1 Out
• Default setting: Video
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to your TV using the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART AV
connector.
If your TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video,
leave it set to Interlace.
Note that when AV1 Out (see page 112) is set to RGB, no
video is output from the component video jacks.
Important
See also Progressive scan video in the glossary on
• If you make a setting here that is incompatible with
your TV, the TV may not display any picture at all. If
this happens either switch everything off and
reconnect to the TV using either the supplied video
cable, or an S-video cable (see Using the S-video or
component video output on page 15 for more on this),
or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on
page 123 for how to do this).
page 136.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Input Colour System
Component Video Out
AV1 Out
AV2/L1 In
NTSC on PAL TV
Video
S-Video
RGB
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
• Video – Compatible with all TVs, but lowest quality of
the three AV settings.
112
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
• S-Video – Almost the same quality as RGB, but can
give better results if you are using a long SCART
cable.
NTSC on PAL
TV
Output when
stopped
Input Line System
625 System
• RGB – If your TV is compatible, this setting gives the
best picture quality.
Off
On
Off
On
PAL
PAL
AV2/L1 In
• Default setting: Video
525 System
NTSC
PAL–60
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to another component using the AV2(INPUT 1/
DECODER) AV connector.
Initial Setup
Audio In settings
Basic
Tuner
Input Colour System
Component Video Out
AV1 Out
AV2/L1 In
NTSC on PAL TV
Video
S-Video
RGB
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
NICAM Select
• Default setting: NICAM
Decoder
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
Input Level (L3)
NICAM
Regular Audio
The AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector input can be
set to one of the following settings:
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
• Video – Sets the input signal type to composite
video.
• S-Video – Sets the input signal type to S-video.
• RGB – Sets the input signal type to RGB video (See
also Input Line System on page 108).
If you want to record the non-NICAM audio in a TV
broadcast, select Regular Audio, otherwise set to
NICAM. (When set to NICAM, you can still select
Regular Audio using the AUDIO button. See Changing
audio channels on page 33.)
• Decoder – Use this setting if you are using a decoder
connected to the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) input.
(For scrambled channels, make sure that the manual
channel Decoder setting is set to On—see also
Manual CH Setting on page 110).
Tuner Level
• Default setting: Normal
NTSC on PAL TV
• Default setting: On
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
Normal
Compression
Initial Setup
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
Input Level (L3)
Basic
Tuner
Input Colour System
Component Video Out
AV1 Out
AV2/L1 In
NTSC on PAL TV
On
Off
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Set to Compression if the audio level from the built-in
tuner is excessively high causing distortion.
When set to On, NTSC discs (from the U.S., for example)
will play correctly on a PAL-only TV. Change to Off if your
1
TV is already NTSC-compatible.
Depending on this setting and the Input Line System
setting (see Input Line System on page 108), the signal
format output when the recorder is stopped varies as
shown in the table below.
Note
1 Many recent PAL TVs are capable of correctly displaying NTSC pictures without the need for this setting. Check the manual that came with
your TV if you’re not sure whether yours has this feature.
113
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
On the Stereo1 setting, the sound that was recorded
while shooting is used. On the Stereo2 setting, the
overdubbed sound is used. You can also choose a Mix
setting of 25%, 50% or 75% for the Stereo 1 with a
corresponding Stereo 2 setting of 75%, 50% or 25%.
External Audio
• Default setting: Stereo
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
Stereo
Bilingual
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
Input Level (L3)
Input Level (L1 / L2 / L3)
• Default setting: 0dB
Initial Setup
If the external source is standard stereo, leave set to
Stereo. If each channel carries a separate soundtrack,
change to Bilingual.
Basic
Tuner
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
Input Level (L3)
+6dB
+3dB
0dB
–3dB
–6dB
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio
subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder
whether the audio is stereo or bilingual. This has priority
over the setting you make here.
You can adjust the gain of the audio from each external
input individually, from –6dB to +6dB in steps of 3 dB to
optimize the recorded audio level.
Bilingual Recording
• Default setting: A/L
Initial Setup
Audio Out settings
Basic
Tuner
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
A/L
B/R
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
Input Level (L3)
Digital Out
• Default setting: On
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Digital Out
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
On
Off
When recording a bilingual source from an external input
in Video mode or VR mode set to FINE/MN32, or to the
HDD, you can choose to record either the A/L (left), or
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
1
the B/R (right) audio channel.
DV Input
If at any time you need to switch off the digital audio
output, set this to Off, otherwise leave it On.
• Default setting: Stereo1
You need to set this if you have a camcorder using 32kHz/
12-bit sound connected to the front panel DV IN/OUT jack.
Dolby Digital Out
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using
the digital output.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Input Level (L1)
Input Level (L2)
Input Level (L3)
Stereo1
Stereo2
Mix (Stereo1: 75%)
Mix (Stereo1: 50%)
Mix (Stereo1: 25%)
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
• Default setting: Dolby Digital
Initial Setup
Basic
Digital Out
Dolby Digital
Tuner
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
Dolby Digital ꢅ PCM
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Some digital camcorders have two stereo tracks for
audio. One is recorded at the time of shooting; the other
is for overdubbing after shooting.
Note
1 If you’re recording in VR mode (except when set to FINE/MN32), both channels will be recorded and you can switch them as you like on play-
back.
114
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)
is Dolby Digital compatible, set to Dolby Digital,
otherwise set to Dolby Digital ꢅ PCM. Check the
manual that came with the connected component if
you’re unsure whether it is Dolby Digital compatible.
If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)
is compatible with high sampling rate audio (88.2 / 96
kHz), set to 96kHz, otherwise set to 96kHz ꢅ 48kHz.
Check the manual that came with the connected
component if you’re unsure whether it is compatible with
high sampling rate audio.
DTS Out
MPEG Out
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using
the digital output.
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using
the digital output.
• Default setting: On
• Default setting: MPEG ꢅ PCM
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
Basic
Digital Out
On
Tuner
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
Off
Basic
Tuner
Digital Out
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
MPEG
MPEG ꢅ PCM
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)
has a built-in DTS decoder, set to On, otherwise set to
Off. Check the manual that came with the connected
component if you’re unsure whether it is DTS
compatible.
If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)
is MPEG audio compatible, set to MPEG, otherwise set to
MPEG ꢅ PCM. Check the manual that came with the
connected component if you’re unsure whether it is
MPEG compatible.
Important
• If you set to On with a non-DTS compatible amp/
receiver, noise will be output when you play a DTS
disc.
Language settings
• When set to On, there is no analog audio output
when playing a DTS DVD-Video disc.
OSD Language
• Default setting: English
• When playing a DTS audio CD (even when DTS Out
is Off), noise is output from the analog outputs. Do
not play this through your amplifier and speakers.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
OSD Language
English
Français
Deutsch
Italiano
Español
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
• When playing a DTS audio CD, make sure that
Stereo is selected using the AUDIO button. See
Switching audio channels on page 58.
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
96kHz PCM Out
This sets the language of the on-screen menus and
displays.
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using
the digital output.
• Default setting: 96kHz ꢅ 48kHz
Audio Language
• Default setting: English
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Digital Out
Dolby Digital Out
DTS Out
96kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
Initial Setup
96kHz ꢅ 48kHz
96kHz
Basic
Tuner
OSD Language
English
French
German
Italian
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
Spanish
Other
115
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
This setting is your preferred audio language for DVD
discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a
disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc in that
language (although this depends on the Auto Language
setting—see Auto Language on page 116).
When set to On, the recorder selects the default audio
language on a DVD disc (French dialog for a French
movie, for example), and displays subtitles in your
preferred subtitle language only if that is set to
1
something different. In other words, movies in your
native language won’t have any subtitles, while foreign
language movies will be shown with subtitles.
Choose Other if you want to specify a language other
than those listed (see Selecting ‘Other’ languages on
page 117).
Set to Off to have the recorder play discs strictly
according to your Audio Language and Subtitle
Language settings.
Tip
For Auto Language to work, the Audio Language and
Subtitle Language settings must be the same—see
Audio Language on page 115 and Subtitle Language
above.
• You can switch between the languages recorded on
a DVD disc any time during playback using the
AUDIO button. (This does not affect this setting.)
Subtitle Language
• Default setting: English
Tip
• You can still switch audio and subtitle languages on
playback using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE buttons.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
OSD Language
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Other
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
DVD Menu Language
• Default setting: w/Subtitle Language
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
OSD Language
w/Subtitle Language
English
French
German
Italian
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
This setting is your preferred subtitle language for DVD
discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a
disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc with those
subtitles (although this depends on the Auto Language
setting—see Auto Language below).
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Spanish
Other
Choose Other if you want to specify a language other
than those listed (see Selecting ‘Other’ languages on
page 117).
Some multilingual discs have disc menus in several
languages. This setting specifies in which language the
disc menus should appear. Leave on the default setting
for menus to appear in the same language as your
Subtitle Language—see Subtitle Language above.
Tip
Choose Other if you want to specify a language other
than those listed (see Selecting ‘Other’ languages on
page 117).
• You can change or switch off the subtitles on a DVD
disc any time during playback using the SUBTITLE
button. (This does not affect this setting.)
Subtitle Display
• Default setting: On
Auto Language
• Default setting: On
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
Basic
OSD Language
On
Tuner
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
Off
Basic
Tuner
OSD Language
On
Off
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Assist Subtitle
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Note
1 Even when set to On, Auto Language may not work with some discs. In this case, set the audio and subtitle languages using the AUDIO and
SUBTITLE buttons.
116
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
When set to On, the recorder displays subtitles
according to the Subtitle Language and Auto
Language settings. Set to Off to switch subtitles off
altogether (although you may find that some discs
override this setting). Set to Assist Subtitle to have the
recorder display the extra assistive subtitles recorded on
to some DVD discs.
On the default setting there are five different recording
time/picture quality settings, FINE, SP, LP, EP and SLP. If
you want to create a custom setting, switch on Manual
1
Recording and select one of the 32 manual settings.
When recording, you can select your Manual Recording
setting using the REC MODE button.
1
Select ‘On (go to setup)’ to display the manual
recording setting screen.
Selecting ‘Other’ languages
Pr 5
DVD Remain 2h00m
1
Select ‘Other’ from the language list.
HDD Remain 30h33m
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.
SLP EP
LP
SP
FINE
MN 9(4h00m/DVD) 2.60Mbps
Preview
2
Select the language you want.
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to
Initial Setup
change the manual recording level.
DVD Menu Language
OSD La
Basic
Tuner
Audio
Subtitl
• You can also use the ꢋ and ꢌ buttons to cycle
between levels MN1, MN3, MN9, MN21 and MN32.
Language
English
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Auto L
DVD M
Subtitl
Number
0
5
1
4
• To preview the recording quality, press ꢁ (cursor
down) and select Preview. To return to the level
adjust screen, press ENTER.
• Select by language name: Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/
right) buttons to change the language.
3
Press ENTER to set the manual recording level
and return to the menu screen.
• Select by code number: Press ꢁ (cursor down) then
use the number buttons to enter the four-digit
language code.
Optimized Rec
• Default setting: Off
See Language code list on page 131 for a list of available
languages and corresponding codes.
Initial Setup
3
Press ENTER to confirm and exit the screen.
Basic
Tuner
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
On
Off
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Recording settings
On the default setting, if a timer program (standard, easy
or VIDEO Plus+ programming system) is set but there
isn’t enough space on the disc at the recording quality
set, the recording will start, but it will be cut off when the
disc is full. Set Optimized Rec to On to have the recorder
automatically adjust the recording quality to fit the
Manual Recording
• Default setting: Off
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
On (go to setup)
Off
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Navi Mark
2
available disc space.
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Note
1 • The preset picture quality settings correspond to the following manual settings: FINE: MN32, SP: MN21, LP: MN9, EP: MN3, SLP: MN1.
• See Manual recording modes on page 130 for detailed information on the manual recording levels.
2 • You may notice a reduction in picture quality if the recorder has to fit a lot of extra material into the remaining time available on the disc.
• If, even on recording level MN 1, there is insufficient space available on the disc, the recording is made on the HDD at the quality setting
you originally specified.
• Optimized Recording only compensates for the first (earliest starting) timer program if more than one has been set.
• Optimized recording works only with DVD recordings.
• Optimized recording can’t be used together with VPS/PDC.
117
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Navi Mark
• Default setting: 0 seconds
Important
• When you change this setting the Copy List is erased.
Make sure it is set how you want it before you start
putting together a Copy List.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
0 seconds
30 seconds
3 minutes
• The Frame Accurate setting has no effect on the
actual video content stored on the HDD.
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
DVD-RW Auto Init.
• Default setting: VR Mode
In the Disc Navigator, each title is shown with a still
frame picture to remind you what it is. This setting lets
you decide the default still frame. The default setting of 0
seconds takes the first frame of the title, but you can also
set it to 30 seconds or 3 minutes into the title (if the title
is shorter than the setting, then the first frame is used).
When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc the recorder
automatically initializes it for recording. You can set it to
initialize the disc for VR mode or Video mode recording.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
VR Mode
Video Mode
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Auto Chapter (Video)
• Default setting: 10 minutes
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
No Separation
10 minutes
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Navi Mark
15 minutes
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Playback settings
TV Screen Size
• Default setting: 16:9
When recording in Video mode, a new chapter is started
every 10 minutes on the default setting. You can change
this interval to 15 minutes, or switch off automatic
chapter marking altogether with the No Separation
setting.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
16:9
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Frame Accurate
• Default setting: Off
If you have a widescreen TV, select the 16:9 setting—
widescreen DVD software is then shown using the full
screen area. When playing software recorded in
conventional (4:3) format, the settings on your TV will
determine how the material is presented—see the
manual that came with your TV for details on what
options are available.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Manual Recording
Optimized Rec
Navi Mark
Auto Chapter (Video)
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
On
Off
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
If you have a conventional TV, choose either 4:3 (Letter
Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan). In Letter Box mode,
When Frame Accurate setting is Off, exact frame
accuracy is traded for high-speed copying when
recording a Copy List. Switch Frame Accurate On to
preserve the accuracy of the Copy List. However, copying
some edited Video mode titles will be done in real time.
widescreen software is shown with black bars at the top
and bottom of the screen. Pan & Scan chops the sides off
widescreen material to make it fit the 4:3 screen (so even
though the picture looks larger on the screen, you’re
actually seeing less of the movie). See Screen sizes and
disc formats on page 124 for more information.
Note that when the recorder is connected to a TV or
monitor via HDMI, the aspect ratio is fixed at 16:9.
118
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Some discs also support the Country code feature. The
recorder does not play certain scenes on these discs
depending on the Country code you set.
Still Picture
• Default setting: Auto
2
Initial Setup
Before you can set the Parental Lock level or the Country
code you must set a password. As the password owner
you can change the Parental Lock level or Country code
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Field
Frame
Auto
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
3
whenever you like. You can also change the password.
Parental Lock : Set Password
The password you set will enable you to change the
Parental Lock level and Country code setting. It is also the
password that you will need to enter if you want to play a
disc with a parental lock level higher than the recorder.
The recorder uses one of two processes when displaying
a still frame from a DVD disc. The default Auto setting
automatically chooses the best setting each time.
• Field – produces a stable, generally shake-free
image.
1
Select ‘Set Password’.
• Frame – produces a sharper image, but more prone
to shake than field stills.
Initial Setup
Basic
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Set Password
Change Level
Country Code
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Seamless Playback
VR mode
HDD
• Default setting: Off
During playback of a VR mode Play List, you may notice
momentary interruption in the picture at edited points.
The Seamless Playback feature lets you trade-off
accuracy of the edit points for more seamless playback.
When switched On, you may notice that the edit points
are a few frames earlier or later than you set.
2
Use the number buttons to input a four-digit
password.
Initial Setup
Basic
Set Password
TV Sc
Tuner
Still P
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Seam
Paren
Angle
1
2
3
4
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
On
Off
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
3
Press ENTER to set the password.
Parental Lock : Change Password
To change your password, confirm your existing
password then enter a new one.
Parental Lock
• Default level: Off
1
Select ‘Change Password’.
• Default password: none
• Default Country code: us (2119)
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If
the recorder is set to a lower level than the disc, it will
require you to enter a password before the disc will play.
This gives you some control about what your children
Change Password
Change Level
Country Code
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
1
watch on your DVD recorder.
Note
1 Not all discs that you may consider inappropriate for your children use the Parental Lock feature. These discs will always play without requiring
the password first.
2 Changing the country code does not take effect until the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is reloaded).
3 If you forget the password, you can reset the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 123), then set a new password.
119
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
2
Use the number buttons to enter your existing
4
Press ENTER to set the new Parental Lock level.
password.
Parental Lock : Country Code
You may also want to refer to the Country code list on
page 131.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
TV Sc
Still P
Seam
C
h
a
n
ge Password
Current Password
1
2
3
4
Paren
Angle
1
Select ‘Country Code’.
New Password
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Change Password
Change Level
3
4
Press ENTER.
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Country Code
Enter a new password.
Initial Setup
Change Password
TV Sc
Still P
Basic
Tuner
2
Use number buttons to enter your password,
Seam
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
then press ENTER.
Current Password
Paren
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
Angle
New Password
Initial Setup
Basic
Parental Lock: Country Code
TV Sc
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Still P
Seam
Paren
Angle
1
2
3
4
9
Password
5
Press ENTER.
us
Code
2
1
1
Number
Parental Lock : Change Level
1
Select ‘Change Level’.
3
Select a Country code.
There are two ways you can do this.
Initial Setup
• Select by code letter: Use ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) to
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
Change Password
Change Level
Country Code
change the country code.
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Initial Setup
Parental Lock: Country Code
TV Sc
Basic
Tuner
Still P
Seam
Paren
1
2
3
4
9
Password
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Angle
us
2
Use number buttons to enter your password,
then press ENTER.
Code
Number
2
1
1
Initial Setup
• Select by code number: Press ꢁ (cursor down) then
use the number buttons to enter the four-digit
country code (you can find the Country code list on
page 131.)
TV ScParental Lock : Change Level
Basic
Tuner
Still P
Seam
1
2
3
4
Password
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Paren
Angle
Off
Initial Setup
Parental Lock: Country Code
TV Sc
Basic
Still P
Seam
Paren
Tuner
3
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor left/right) buttons to select
1
2
3
4
9
Password
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
a new parental lock level.
Angle
us
Code
2
1
1
Number
Initial Setup
Parental Lock : Change Level
TV Sc
Basic
Tuner
Still P
Seam
Paren
1
2
3
4
Password
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
4
Press ENTER to set the new Country code.
Angle
Off
120
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
Angle Indicator
Colour
• Default setting: On
This setting determines the video output colour format.
Depending on the connected equipment, some HDMI
Colour settings may cause the picture to be displayed
incorrectly. In this case, use the TV’s own video input
settings to select RGB, if possible. Alternatively, revert to
the previous HDMI Colour setting.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
TV Screen Size
Still Picture
On
Off
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Seamless Playback
Parental Lock
Angle Indicator
• Full Range RGB – Gives brighter colours and deeper
black. Use if colours are weak. (This is the standard
setting for HDMI-compatible DVI devices, but it is
also effective with HDMI devices.)
On the default setting, when playing a DVD-Video disc
that features multi-angle scenes, an icon appears on-
screen during the parts of the disc where angle switching
is available. Change to Off to hide the on-screen
indicator.
• RGB – Use this setting if colours appear overly rich on
the Full Range RGB setting.
1
• Component (12-bit) – Outputs 12-bit component
video format. If your connected device is compatible
with this setting, 12-bit output provides very fine
gradations of colour.
• Component – Outputs 8-bit component video
format. This is the standard setting for HDMI-
compatible devices.
HDMI Output
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
player to an HDMI-compatible device using the HDMI
connector.
2
Audio Output
Initial Setup
If the monitor or device you have connected using HDMI
is not compatible with compressed multi-channel
formats, you should set this to PCM, otherwise set to
Auto.
HDMI Ouput
Aspect
Colour
Audio Output
Bilingual Setting
Progressive (Full)
Full Rage RGB
Auto
On
• PCM – All audio signals are downmixed to linear
PCM (2-channel).
• Auto – Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG sources are
processed according to how they were encoded, and
linear PCM sources are heard with no processing.
Select HDMI Settings to proceed to the settings screen.
Aspect
Select an aspect ratio according to the kind of display you
have, and how you want to see the image on-screen. See
also Screen sizes and disc formats on page 124.
3
Bilingual Setting
• On – Main and sub audio channels are switchable
using the AUDIO button or the Bilingual Recording
setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 114).
• Progressive (Full) – This is the standard setting for
an HDMI-compatible TV or projector.
• Off – Audio channels are output from the front left
and right speakers. Main and sub channels are not
switchable.
• Progressive (Normal) – If 4:3 pictures appear
distorted (stretched) on the Progressive (Full)
setting and cannot be compensated for using the TVs
own aspect settings, use this setting.
Note
1 If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with this setting, the setting automatically reverts to Component.
2 When connected to an HDCP-compatible DVI device it is not possible to make any Audio Output settings since audio is not output to DVI
devices.
3 This can only be set when Audio Output is set to Auto.
121
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Initial Setup menu
14
About HDMI Output default settings
If you disconnect an HDMI-compatible device then
reconnect (to the same device), the settings you make in
the HDMI Output screen are maintained. If you connect
a different device, the following settings are
automatically set:
HDMI-compatible device
• Aspect – Progressive (Full)
• Colour – Component (12-bit) (However, if the
connected device is not compatible with 12-bit
component colour format, then the setting will be
Component.)
• Audio Output – Auto (However, if the connected
device is compatible only with PCM audio then the
setting will be PCM.)
• Bilingual Setting – If Audio Output is set to Auto,
then this is set to On.
HDCP-compatible DVI device
• Aspect – Progressive (Full)
• Colour – RGB Full Range
122
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Chapter 15
Additional information
Maker
Code
66
Resetting the recorder
Alba
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory
settings.
Bush
76
Finlux
84
1
Make sure that the recorder is on.
Fisher
61, 65
77
2
ON.
Press and hold ꢄ STOP and press ꢆ STANDBY/
Fujitsu
Funai
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.
67
Goldstar
Grandiente
Grundig
Hitachi
ITT
79
Setting up the remote to control your
TV
87
51, 82
56, 60, 83, 86
70
You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be
able to use this feature you first have to program the
remote with a maker code from the table below.
1
Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then
Mitsubishi
Nokia
59
enter the maker code for your TV.
The LED indicator on the remote controls lights.
53, 81
58, 72
57, 85
50, 80
68
See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is
more than one code given for your make, input the first
one in the list.
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
RCA
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the
table below, you will not be able to use this remote to
control your TV.
2
Press ꢆ TV to check that the remote works with
Salora
Samsung
Sanyo
71
your TV.
73, 75
74
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/
off. If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your
maker, repeat step 1 with a new code.
Sei
78
Using the TV remote control buttons
The table below shows how to use this remote control
with your TV.
Sharp
52
Sony
54
Tandy
69
Button
What it does
Telefunken
Thomson
Toshiba
Victor
64
ꢆ TV
Press to switch the TV on/off (standby)
62
INPUT SELECT Press to change the TV’s video input
TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume
TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels
55
63
123
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Screen sizes and disc formats
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting
Appearance
16:9
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
16:9
The program is shown in
widescreen with black bars at
the top and bottom of the
screen.
The sides of the program are
cropped so that the picture
fills the whole screen.
4:3
The program appears
squashed. Set to either 4:3
(Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan &
Scan).
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The program is presented
correctly on either setting.
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting
Appearance
16:9
16:9
The program is presented in
widescreen.
4:3
16:9
Your TV will determine how the
picture is presented—check
the manual that came with the
TV for details.
124
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Troubleshooting
15
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the
other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the
points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
General
Problem
Remedy
The disc is automatically ejected
after closing the disc tray
• Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD+R/RW or other incompatible format
disc (page 9).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 133).
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder (page 136).
No picture
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 12).
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct
input.
• The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible TV. Reset to
interlace by pressing and holding the ꢄ button (front panel) and then pressing
DISC NAVIGATOR.
Can’t play a disc
• Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD+R/RW or other incompatible format
disc (page 9).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 133).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so
for the condensation to evaporate.
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System
different to the current recorder setting.
All settings are reset
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on,
all the settings will be lost.
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the
power cord.
Screen goes blank and controls are • Press ꢄ STOP then restart playback.
inoperative
Remote control does not work
• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the CONTROL
IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 12).
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 109). (When
the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.)
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 8).
• Replace the batteries (page 8).
No sound or sound is distorted
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume
turned up.
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow
motion play. Press ꢅ PLAY to resume regular playback.
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or
DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a suitable decoder, also make
sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Output setting is On.
• Some 96kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case,
switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog.
• Check the audio cable connections (page 12).
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.
125
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Problem
Remedy
The picture from the external input • If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot
is distorted
connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.
The picture is distorted
• Change the Input Line System setting (page 108). (You can also change it by
pressing the ꢄ button and STOP REC on the front panel simultaneously with the
recorder stopped.)
Screen is stretched vertically or hori- • Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 118) is correct for the kind of TV
zontally
you have (see also page 124).
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the
input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1
(widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio
(standard) video.
Can’t play a disc recorded using this • If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that it’s finalized (page 69).
recorder on another player
•Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video
mode and finalized.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW
compatible in order to play it (page 9).
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM
compatible players (page 61).
During playback the picture is dark • When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display
or distorted
correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.
Can’t control your TV using this
remote control
• If there is more than one code listed for your make of TV, try each one in turn
(page 123).
• It is possible that none of the codes listed will work with your particular model of
TV, even if the maker appears in the remote control code list.
Can’t record or does not record suc- • Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.
cessfully
• For a Video mode disc, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.
• The HDD may contain up to 999 titles; one DVD disc 99 (Original) titles and 999
chapters. Check that these limits have not been reached.
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 102).
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the
disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV
system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line
System setting to match what you want to record (page 108).
• The power may have failed during recording.
Timer program doesn’t record suc- • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV
cessfully
tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected
cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material
(page 61).
• Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will
record completely.
• The power may have failed during recording.
After briefly unplugging or after a • A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from
power failure the front panel dis-
play shows ‘--:--’
being reset when there is no power to the recorder. This battery should last
approximately five years from factory shipping.
Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. To have the
battery replaced, contact your dealer or a Pioneer Service Center.
126
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Problem
Remedy
Front panel display shows ‘LOCK’
when a button is pressed
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 66).
Can’t use One Touch Copy (HDD to • Make sure that there is a recordable DVD loaded with some free space for
DVD)
recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a
Video mode disc, the disc isn’t finalized.
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One
Touch Copy will not work.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.
Can’t use One Touch Copy (DVD to • Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than
HDD)
999 titles on the HDD.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.
The picture freezes and the front
panel and remote control buttons
stop working
• Press the front panel ꢆ STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then
switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold
ꢆ STANDBY/ON for 10 seconds until the power switches off.
HDMI
Problem
Remedy
The connected HDMI or DVI device • Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the power of both
does not display any picture (and components is on).
the front panel HDMI indicator does • Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on.
not light)
• Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next, switch on the
HDMI/DVI device and leave it for around 30 seconds, then switch on this recorder.
• When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.
– The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a non-standard cable may
result in no picture being output.
– Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single cable to
connect devices together.
• When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.
– The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible.
– The connected device is compatible with 480 x 720 (NTSC) and/or 576 x 480 (PAL)
progressive video input.
• If the recorder’s internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no HDMI
output.
• Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder.
There’s no sound from the con-
nected HDMI or DVI device.
• There is no sound when using a DVI terminal.
• Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with the manual
that came with the connected device).
Note
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
127
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
• Can I record continuously on the HDD for more than
eight hours?
Frequently asked questions
Yes, timer recordings made to the HDD can by set for
up to 24 hours (excluding those set using the Easy
Timer Recording screen). However, because the
maximum length of a title is eight hours, the
recording will be spread over two or more titles. Note
that there will be a short break in the recording
between titles.
In this section you can find answers to frequently asked
questions on how to use your DVD recorder and what it
can do.
• How do I make a high-quality copy?
We recommend that you use the high-speed copy
mode. Although the copy is faster than real time,
there is no loss of picture or sound quality compared
to the original.
See also Setting a timer recording on page 63.
If there is not enough space on the disc to make a
copy at the same picture quality as the original, we
recommend that you change the recording mode to
‘Optimized’. This will fit the recording on to the
available space on the disc.
• Can I copy a finalized Video mode disc (DVD-R or DVD-
RW) to the HDD?
Yes. Start playing the Video mode disc and use the
One Touch Copy button to copy the currently playing
title to the HDD. Repeat for as many titles on the disc
as you want to copy.
See also Copying and back-up on page 71.
See also One Touch Copy (DVD to HDD) on page 73.
• Can I make a DVD copy of, say, a movie that has had
the commercials edited out?
• Can I use high-speed copy to copy from DVD to HDD?
Yes. There are two ways to do this. You can either edit
the video on the HDD then copy the edited version to
DVD, or you can assemble a Copy List that cuts out
the commercials, then record that to DVD.
You can only use high-speed copy from DVD to HDD
when copying Original titles from a VR mode DVD-
RW.
See also Copying and back-up on page 71.
See also Copying from DVD to HDD on page 81.
• I have a two-hour recording on the HDD made in FINE
mode. Can I copy this to DVD in high-speed mode?
• Can I copy a copy-once protected program from a
subscription satellite or cable channel to a DVD from
the HDD?
A standard DVD disc can hold only an hour of FINE
mode material, so you wouldn’t be able to make a
high-speed copy of this on to one disc. You could
divide up the recording on the HDD into two titles of
an hour each and copy these to two DVDs (using
high-speed copy). Alternatively, you could copy the
material in SP (or Optimized) so as to fit it all on to one
disc (note that there will be some loss in picture
quality if you do this).
Yes, you can use high-speed copy to copy to a VR
mode DVD-RW disc. You can also divide the
recording on the HDD into a number of smaller titles
if the whole recording won’t fit on to one disc.
See also Copying from HDD to DVD on page 73.
• Can I play a DVD I recorded on this recorder on another
DVD player?
See also Copying and back-up on page 71.
Yes, you can generally play DVD-R discs and Video
mode DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder on
any standard DVD player. You may find, however, that
some players will not play some recordable media.
• Can I record a bilingual broadcast to the HDD, keeping
both audio channels and switch them on playback?
No. Only the audio channel set in the Bilingual
Recording setting in the Initial Settings menu will be
recorded. If you need to record both channels of
audio, please record using a VR mode DVD-RW disc.
For VR mode DVD-RW discs, look for the ‘RW
Compatible’ mark to see if it will play the disc.
See also Bilingual Recording on page 114.
128
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
DV-related messages
You may see the following messages appear on your TV
screen when using the DV IN/OUT jack.
About DV
Using DV, also known as i.LINK, you can connect a DV-
equipped camcorder to this recorder using a single DV
cable for input and output of audio, video, data and
control signals.
• No DV camcorder connected. – The camcorder is
not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched
off.
• The DV camcorder is recording. – The camcorder is
recording, so you cannot start recording from the
camcorder to this recorder.
The i.LINK interface is also known as IEEE 1394-1995.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-format
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite tuners and
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.
• You cannot connect more than one DV
camcorder at the same time. – The DV jack on this
recorder supports connection to just one camcorder.
• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at
a time to this recorder.
• No tape in the DV camcorder. – There is no
cassette loaded into the connected equipment.
• You cannot control this recorder from external
equipment connected via the DV IN/OUT jack.
• The DV camcorder is in record-pause mode. – The
camcorder is in record-pause mode.
• It may not always be possible to control the
• DV camcorder playback canceled.
Recording has been paused. – Recording was
paused because the camcorder is not in playback
mode.
connected camcorder via the DV IN/OUT jack.
• This recorder only outputs HDD/DVD playback video
from the DV IN/OUT jack; signals from the built-in TV
tuner, CD, Video CD and other inputs are not output.
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder. – This recorder
cannot control the camcorder. Try switching off the
camcorder then switching it back on.
• Copy-protected or copy-once video is not output from
the DV IN/OUT jack.
• Digital camcorders can usually record audio as
stereo 16-bit/48kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/
32kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo
audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see
DV Input on page 114).
• Could not operate the DV camcorder. – This
recorder was not able to control the camcorder.
• Recording has stopped because the recorded
material on the tape finished. – When the recorded
part of the DV tape comes to an end, this recorder
automatically stops recording.
• Audio output from the DV IN/OUT jack is 16-bit only.
• Audio input to the DV IN/OUT jack should be 32 or
48kHz (not 44.1kHz).
• Recording has stopped because DV camcorder
playback stopped. – Recording stopped because
DV camcorder playback was stopped or the
camcorder was disconnected.
• Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the
source component pauses playback or plays an
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the
source component, or the DV cable becomes
disconnected.
• The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please
select playback mode on the DV camcorder. – The
camcorder is in camera mode.
129
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Manual recording modes
15
The table below shows the approximate recording times
for all of the 32 manual recording modes, as well as the
standard recording mode equivalents. Levels separated
by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in
picture quality. The divisions for HDD recording are the
same as those for Video mode.
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in
1
Dolby Digital 2ch format , except for MN32 which is in
Linear PCM format.
Video mode /
VR mode
HDD
Level
Rec. time
Level
Rec. time
MN 1
MN 2
MN 3
MN 4
MN 5
MN 6
MN 7
MN 8
480 mins.
420 mins.
360 mins.
330 mins.
300 mins.
285 mins.
270 mins.
255 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
SLP
EP
MN 1
MN 2
MN 3
MN 4
MN 5
MN 6
MN 7
MN 8
480 mins.
420 mins.
360 mins.
330 mins.
300 mins.
285 mins.
270 mins.
255 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
MN 9
LP
MN 9
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
MN 32
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
SP
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins. FINE MN 32
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins.
Note
1.You may notice a change in sound quality in MN1 and MN2, compared with other settings.
130
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Language code list
Language (Language code letter), Language code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Spanish (es), 0519
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Korean (ko), 1115
Greek (el), 0512
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Sinhalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Laothian (lo), 1215
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Irish (ga), 0701
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Afar (aa), 0101
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Byelorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Czech (cs), 0319
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tonga (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Nepali (ne), 1405
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Romanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
Sangho (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Country code list
Country, Country code, Country code letter
Argentina, 0118, ar
Australia, 0121, au
Austria, 0120, at
Belgium, 0205, be
Brazil, 0218, br
Canada, 0301, ca
Chile, 0312, cl
Finland, 0609, fi
France, 0618, fr
Germany, 0405, de
Hong Kong, 0811, hk
India, 0914, in
Indonesia, 0904, id
Italy, 0920, it
Japan, 1016, jp
Malaysia, 1325, my
Mexico, 1324, mx
Netherlands, 1412, nl
New Zealand, 1426, nz
Norway, 1415, no
Pakistan, 1611, pk
Philippines, 1608, ph
Portugal, 1620, pt
Singapore, 1907, sg
Spain, 0519, es
Sweden, 1905, se
Switzerland, 0308, ch
Taiwan, 2023, tw
Thailand, 2008, th
United Kingdom, 0702, gb
USA, 2119, us
China, 0314, cn
Denmark, 0411, dk
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr
Russian Federation, 1821, ru
131
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
On-screen displays and recorder displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation
of their meaning.
Message
Explanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.
When you load a blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder automatically
initializes it.
• Incompatible region number.
The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the
recorder and so will not play.
• Cannot record any more titles.
• No more space for file management data.
• Cannot add any more chapter marks.
The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum
number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/
chapters or combine chapters.
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the final-
ization.
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the
finalization in order to recording/editing.
• Cannot play this disc.
• This disc cannot be recorded.
• Cannot read the CPRM information.
• Could not record the information to the disc.
• Cannot edit.
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and
retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even
with a new disc, please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• Could not initialize disc.
• Could not complete finalization successfully.
• Could not undo finalization successfully.
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.
The disc loaded is a DVD-RAM, DVD+R/RW or some other
incompatible disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is
dirty or damaged.
• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM com-
patible.
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-RW
disc with CPRM for recording.
• Cannot record this content using Video mode
recording.
• This content is copy protected.
• Incorrect CPRM information.
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.
The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder
may be damaged—please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• The audio will conform to the [Bilingual
Recording] setting.
When recording from an external input in Video mode, or in VR
mode set to MN 32, audio is recorded in Linear PCM format. You
can only record the left or right channel; not both.
• Repairing disc.
During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when
the power is restored.
• Could not repair the disc.
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The
contents of the recording will be lost.
• Overheating has stopped operation.
Press DISPLAY to clear this message.
The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the
operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a
Pioneer authorized service center.
132
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Message
Explanation/Action
• There is no DV input or the input signal is unre- No signal was detected at the DV input/output jack. This may
cordable.
appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected
camcorder.
• Cannot preview because there is no DV input
or the input signal is unrecordable.
• This channel’s TV system is different from the
recorder’s setting.
The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different
from the TV system settings of this recorder.
• Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel
Press DISPLAY to clear message. set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder.
• Playback has stopped because the TV system is During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL,
different than the recording.
NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to
stop automatically.
• HDD optimization is recommended. This can be The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to
done using Disc Setup. maintain playback and recording performance.
• Please perform HDD optimization. This can be The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to
done using Disc Setup.
maintain performance.
Handling discs
Storing discs
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl
records, you should still take care to handle and store
discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including
under direct sunlight).
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc
becoming unusable.
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing
instrument. These could all damage the disc.
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust,
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly
from the center to the outside edge as shown in the
diagram below.
For more detailed care information see the instructions
that come with discs.
Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or
other cleaning agents, including products designed for
cleaning vinyl records.
133
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Damaged discs
15
Hints on installation
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can
see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise
damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging
the recorder.
We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so
please bear in mind the following points when choosing
a suitable location for it:
Do...
This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped
discs.
ꢆ
Use in a well-ventilated room.
ꢆ
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table,
shelf or stereo rack.
Don’t...
ꢇ
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or
humidity, including near radiators and other heat-
generating appliances.
ꢇ
Place on a window sill or other place where the
recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.
Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other
ꢇ
ꢇ
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in
use.
Cleaning the pickup lens
The DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in
normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction
due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-
authorized service center. Although lens cleaners for CD
players are commercially available, we do not
recommend using them since some may damage the
lens.
ꢇ
Use near a television or monitor as you may
experience interference—especially if the television uses
an indoor antenna.
ꢇ
Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder
may be exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this
may prevent proper cooling of the unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large
ꢇ
ꢇ
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.
Condensation
Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is
brought into a warm room from outside, or if the
temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the
condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may
temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you
should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for
about an hour before switching on and using.
Moving the recorder
If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if
there’s one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press ꢆ
STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking
that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off.
Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power
cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or
recording—discs rotate at a high speed and may be
damaged.
134
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
DTS
Glossary
Analog audio
DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround
system different from Dolby Digital that has become a
popular surround sound format for movies.
An electrical signal that directly represents sound.
Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical
signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See
also Digital audio.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Aspect ratio
Dynamic range
The width of a TV screen relative to its height.
Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is
almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen
is almost twice as wide as it is high).
The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds
possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting
lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are
capable of a wide dynamic range, delivering dramatic
cinema-like effects.
Chapter
Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on
the HDD/a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See
also Title.
EXIF (Exchangeable Image File)
A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still
cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers
use this compressed file format which carries date, time
and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data.
Digital audio
An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During
recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals
(44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to-
digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On
playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an
analog signal based on these numbers. See also
Sampling frequency and Analog audio.
File extension
A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type
of file. For example, “.mp3” indicates an MP3 file.
HDMI
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a digital
interface that can handle both audio and video using a
single cable. HDMI supports uncompressed high-
definition video and multi-channel audio.
Dolby Digital
1
With multichannel audio, this high quality surround
system is used in many movie theaters around the world.
ISO 9660 format
International standard for the volume and file structure of
CD-ROM discs.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
JPEG
A file format used for still images, such as photographs
and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file
extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”. Most digital cameras use this
format.
DRM (Digital Rights Management)
DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection is a
technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by
restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other the
PC (or other WMA recording equipment) used to record
it. For detailed information, please see the instruction
manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other
WMA recording equipment) and/or software.
MP3
MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file
format. Files are recognized by their file extension “.mp3”
or “.MP3”.
135
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
MPEG audio
Regions (DVD only)
ALL
2
(example region code marks)
Regions associate discs and players with particular
areas of the world. This unit will only play discs that have
compatible region codes. You can find the region code of
your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are
compatible with more than one region (or all regions).
An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD
discs. This unit can convert MPEG audio to PCM format
for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV
amp/receivers. See also PCM.
MPEG video
Sampling frequency
The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD
uses the older MPEG-1 standard, while DVD uses the
newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard.
The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into
digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the
sound quality, but the more digital information is
generated. Standard CD audio has a sampling frequency
of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples
Optical digital output
A jack that outputs digital audio in the form of light
pulses. Connect components with optical digital jacks
using a special optical cord, available from specialist
audio dealers.
(measurements) per second. See also Digital audio.
Title
A collection of chapters on a the HDD/DVD disc. See also
Chapter.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
The most common system of encoding digital audio,
found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a
lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital
and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio
recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amp/receivers with
digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and
MPEG audio to PCM. See also Digital audio.
Track
Audio CDs and Video CDs use tracks to divide up the
content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter.
See also Chapter.
WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an
audio compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using
Windows Media Player version 9 or Windows Media
Player for Windows XP. Files are recognized by their file
extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.
PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only)
A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through
on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good
for discs that you would normally not watch from
beginning to end all at once—karaoke discs, for example.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Progressive scan video
Also called non-interlace video, this method of displaying
a picture updates all the lines in one pass, resulting in a
more stable, flicker-free image than interlaced video (for
a given scanning rate).
PureCinema
DVD-Video may be either video material (originally shot
on video) or film material (originally shot in film). Video
material has a frame rate of 30 frames per second (fps)
(NTSC) or 25 fps (PAL), compared with film’s 24 fps.
PureCinema converts film material to 60 fps (in
progressive scan) for NTSC output, or 50 fps (in
progressive scan) for PAL output.
136
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
Specifications
15
Tuner
Receivable channels
PAL B/G
PAL I
Frequency
Frequency
Channel
Channel
General
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
47 - 89 MHz
E2 - E4
X - Z
44 - 89 MHz
A - C
X - Z
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW,
Video-CD, Super VCD, CD,
104 - 300 MHz
E5 - E12
S1 - S20
M1 - M10
U1 - U10
104 - 300 MHz
D - J
11, 13
S1 - S20
CD-R/RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA)
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 W
Power consumption in standby mode
Hyper
UHF
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
0.7 W
(Front panel display: off)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9 kg
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 (W) x 87 (H) x 357 (D) mm
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+5°C to +35°C
Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5% to 85%
(no condensation)
SECAM L
SECAM D/K
Frequency
Channel
Frequency
Channel
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
49 - 65 MHz
2 - 4
49 - 94 MHz
R1 - R5
104 - 300 MHz
5 - 10
B - Q
104 - 300 MHz
R6 - R12
S1 - S20
TV system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/
NTSC (external input only)
Recording
Hyper
UHF
300 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
S21 - S41
21 - 69
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
Recording format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Video Recording
DVD-VIDEO
Recordable discs
DVD-RW (DVD Re-recordable disc)
DVD-R (DVD Recordable disc)
STEREO
B/G - A2
I - NICAM
L - NICAM
B/G - NICAM
D/K - NICAM
Video recording format
Timer
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5MHz
Compression format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48kHz
Compression format. . . . . . . . .Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
(uncompressed)
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)
Power off memory . . . .Approx. 5 years (after manufacture)
Input/Output
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal . . . . VHF/UHF set
75 Ω (IEC connector)
Recording time
HDD
Fine (FINE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 54 hours
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 108 hours
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 216 hours
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 324 hours
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 433 hours
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 54–433 hours
Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front)
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),
RCA jack (Input 2, 3)
Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 Output
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 1 (AV1)
RCA jack (Output)
S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front)
Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),
4 pin mini DIN (Input 2, 3)
DVD-R/DVD-RW
Fine (FINE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 hour
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 hours
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 hours
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 hours
Super-Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 hours
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1–8 hours
S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 / Output
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),
4 pin mini DIN (Output)
Component video output
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω)
P , P : 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
B
R
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks
RGB input
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)
137
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional information
15
Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1)
RGB output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)
Jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1)
Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front) L/R
Input level
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms
(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1),
RCA jacks (Input 2, 3)
Supplied accessories
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/R6P dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G-LINK cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operating Instructions
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1 Output
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),
RCA jacks (Output)
Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject
to change without notice, due to improvement.
Digital audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . optical / coaxial
DV input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4pin
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)
HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin
Control input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack
G-LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector
This connector provides the video and audio signals for
connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.
PIN no.
AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1)
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
138
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Index
A
N
Areas (GUIDE Plus+) 42 – 49
Audio DRC 106
Audio language 24, 58, 115
Audio settings 113 – 115
Auto language 116, 117
Auto Scan - see Automatic channel setup
Automatic channel setup 26, 109
AV amplifier, connecting to 19
AV connector 108, 110, 112, 113, 138
NexTView 13
NICAM audio 33, 113
NTSC 24, 108, 111, 113
O
One Touch Copy 22, 24, 71, 72 – 73, 128
One Touch Recording 62
One-Button-Record (GUIDE Plus+) 41
On-screen display (OSD) 37, 115
Optimized recording 75, 117
Original content 11, 38, 86, 88, 89 – 93
B
Bilingual audio 24, 33, 58, 61, 62, 114, 128
P
C
PAL 108, 111, 113
Changing TV channels 33, 123
Chase play 6
PBC (PlayBack Control for Video CD) 36, 51, 136
PhotoViewer 100 – 101
Component video 15, 112
Copy List 73 – 84, 118, 128
CPRM 61, 132
Picture quality, adjusting the 104 – 106
Play List 11, 23, 25, 38, 86, 89, 94 – 98
Play Mode menu 24, 55 – 57
Program play 56, 56 – 57
D
Progressive scan video 6, 28, 112
Disc and file formats 9, 124
R
Disc compatibility - see Disc and file formats
Disc Navigator 51 – 53, 86 – 98, 118
Dolby Digital 61, 106, 114, 135
Downloading channel presets from the TV 13, 26, 110
DV camcorder 21, 68, 69
Recording 32, 39, 41, 45, 60 – 70
Recording quality 60, 61, 104
Recovery recording 63
Remote control 8, 24, 109
Repeat play 56, 57
E
Rotating (a JPEG picture) 101
Easy Timer Recording 64
Editing recordings 86 – 98
EPG - See also GUIDE Plus+
S
Scanning 25, 53
SECAM 60, 61, 108, 109, 111
Setting up 26 – 28, 123
Simultaneous recording and playback 66
Slow motion playback 54
Subtitle langauge 24, 58, 116
F
Finalizing discs 38, 69, 103
G
GUIDE Plus+ 12, 24, 29, 40 – 50
T
H
Timer recording 23, 25, 39, 63 – 66
TV aspect ratio 118, 124
HDMI 12, 20, 121 – 122
I
TV audio channel 33, 62, 113, 114
TV system - see Input line system and Input colour system
Initializing discs 60, 70, 103, 118
Input colour system 108, 111
Input line system 108, 111, 113
V
Video mode 23, 60, 69, 70, 72, 103, 118, 128, 130
Video settings 104 – 106, 111 – 113
VPS/PDC 24, 64, 66
J
JPEG picture files 7, 10, 39, 100 – 101, 135
VR mode 10, 60, 62, 69, 70, 72, 89, 94, 103, 118, 128, 130
M
W
Manual channel setup 110
Manual recording mode (MN) 23, 61, 117, 130
MP3 audio 7, 9, 36, 135
MPEG audio 12, 115, 136
WMA audio 7, 9, 36, 136
Z
Zooming (a JPEG picture) 101
139
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2004 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_A_En
Printed in China
<VRB1352-A>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|